SlideShare a Scribd company logo
EMCO F1-CNC
Basic

Preface
The use of CNC-machines will still
increase in the future.
Not only in industrial production also in
small workshops conventional machines will be replaced by CNC-machines.
The application of CNC-technics is not
bound to the classic machine tools
such as lathes, milling machines or to
the metalworking area. One could say,
nearly every day a new application of
CNC technics is realized. Practically
all occupations such as technical designer, technical manager or salesman, skilled worker, methods engineer, controller, etc. will be confronted with CNC-technology in many
ways.

CNC basic knowledge is important for
everyone of them. How spezialized this
knowledge must be, will depend on the
specific occupation.
EMCO MAIER & CO. is also producer
of CNC production machines and since
a long time experienced and active in
technical education worldwide.
After producing the EMCO COMPACT
5 CNC which is used worldwide successfully for years, the EMCO Fl-CNC
has been developed.
As the method and the concept of the
EMCO COMPACT 5 CNC has been very
successful, we designed the F1-CNC also that way: the student should work
on the machine from the very first hour.
Marialin for
t ools

Many contents which ale difficult to explain and often
net understood when taught theoretically, can only be
explained by working on the CNC.machine.
Operating a CNC machine, milling with ditterenl cut
ete. can only be learned by practical working.

Chip guard

CNC milling machismo are built in different types:
Horizontal-, vertical, portal milling machines, inachi
lung centers, etc Therefore we designed the machine
so that CNC. milling . covering all types can be pc(
termed
Consider machin• and teaching material as a The
book BASIS is developed for the student. For the tea.
cher an additional handbook and Overhead slides are
available. Use this handbook in addition to the bock
BASIS if you want to do it in a self teaching course.

Switch tti change
axis system
h-OriioniTairvertical

ChuCtl change
loonslem

MilitioHead IQ/
tye
•

Ali rignts reserved especially those of diffusion and duplication through film, radio, television. photomechanical
reproduction. sound tracks of any and every kind, translation into foreign languages, reprints Of, extracts from the text.
0': 1984 by EMCO MAIER & CO. Fabrik fUr Speziaimaschinen, FriedmanmMaier-Stralie 9, A-5400 HaHein, Austria.
Printed in Austria,
1. General

— Technological data
— Finding the Chip Removal Values, Speeds
— Mounting the Tools
-- Chucking the Workpieces
Technological data
3. Feed Rate and Depth of Cut

1. Cutting speed (Vs)
Vs (m/min)

d (mm) x lr x S ( rpm)
1000

F = Feed rate (mm/min)
t = Depth of cut (mm)

Vs = Cutting speed

Generally: feed rate and cutting speed
depend on-

d = Diameter of workpiece
S = Main spindle speed
The maximum cutting speed
- Material

depends

- workpiece material
- performance of machine and
- geometry of milling cutter.

on

of workpiece:

higher the resistance of the material,
the lower the cutting speed.
The charts contain the following data:
V s = 44 m/min for aluminium (Torradur
Vs =

35

B)

m/min for soft steel
soft plastics

V s = 25 m,/min for tool steel
hard plastics
- Material of tool:
Carbide tools allow higher cutting speed
than HSS tools.
values given in the charts are for
HSS tools.

2. Spindle speed (S)
tile speed of the milling
spindle from cutting speed and diameter
of milling cutter.

S (rpm) =

Vs (rnimin) x 1000
d (mm) x

Material of workpiece
The higher the material resistance the
larger the feed and the depth of cut
(limitation by milling cutter geometry).
The charts contain orientation values
for the F1-CNC.
Connection F

t

The larger "t" the smaller "F" and vice
versa.
Procedure
The technological data are written into
the tool specification sheet.
Finding the feed rate and the depth of
cut:
Material: aln inium

71)

• .

FecA1

tx:

w,

Me.

i

r".'

Depth of cut
(t = 10 mm)

i
j

IF = 60

• •

t") Dia. of milling
(d=10 mm) I

1

L__

cutter

mm/mil711

L___

You can also proceed in a different
way:
Feed rate F
200
'14

, 1 ,–H Dia, of milling
cutter 10 mm)
I

I
"'Depth of cut 4,2 mml

LA(

Finding the speed of rotations:
Diameter of milling cutter

vs
S

Correct cutting speed for the
specific material
Spindle speed
The same procedure appiies for drilling.
PS: Dcwncut milling -- Conventional
Milling
The specific knowledge is presupposed.
however, with the Fl-CNC the differences may be neglected.
Milling
Depth of cut • Cutter diameter - Feed

Drilling
Diameter of drill bit • Feed
mm

1
10
9

8

1,5

20

30

40

50 60

80 100

150

200

300

400

WO, mm/min
Speed (of rotation) — Cutting speed — Feed

25 00
2000

c
E

0

150 0

1000
900

800
700
600
500

400
300

200

Attention
When plunging in with cutter, halve feed
values of mill chart.
Service and Maintenance of Machine
Lubrication:

Lubricate guideways of longitudinal, cross
and vertical slide daily using oil gun (1
nipple on vertical slide, 2 nipples left
side underneath longitudinal slide).
Pressure resistant, corrosion-protective oil with slip-stick reducing
characteristics.
73 mm/sec (cSt) reference temperature 40° C.
E.g. CASTROL MAGNA BD 68
This corresponds to the CINCINNATI
Specification P47.
Spindle taper for tool mounting

Interior taper of main spindle and tool taper
have to be free of grease and dust (force
locking)1

Safety measures
Pay attention to the general and specific
milling safety rules. The knowledge about
them is pre-supposed.

Raw material
If you • use aluminium, take only machinable.
aluminium.
Advisable material:
Torradur 3, Al, Cu, Mg, Pa F38, material no.
3,1645,51 according to DIN 1725/1747 or similar.

Tools
Use high quality and well sharpened tools only.
Clamping of Tools
Attention:
Spindle taper and tool taper must be dirtand dust-free.

Clamping with collet chuck
Tools with cylindrical shaft are clamped
with the collet chuck.

Note:
Put collet into nut inclined so that
the eccentric ring grips the groove
of the collet. Screw nut with collet
onto collet chuck.

Taking out the collet:
Unscrew nut. The eccentric ring in the
nut presses the collet out when unscrewing.
Maintenance
Use oil and clean collet and collet
chuck after use. Chips and dirt can damage the tapers and influence the precision.
Collets

Clamping of tools
Put tool into collet and tighten aut
with cylindrical pin in clockwise direction. For counter-holding of main
spindle put cylindrical pin into collet holder.

1A

You find the clamping capacity in inch
• and metric engraved on the collets. Diameters smaller or larger than indicated
must not be clatped.
Clamping with shell end mill arbor

Using the arbor you can clamp tools up
to a bore of 16 mm. The 4 spacing collars serve for adjusting the different
width of the milling cutters.

02m:ffiti
Clamping Possibilities for Workpieces
Clamping bars
The clamping bars are mounted directly
onto the slide depending on the relative workpiece.

Machine vice with stop
Width of jaw: 60 mm
Clamping capacity. 60 mm

Stepped clamping shoe
Height: 60 mm
For clapping a workpiece
need
at least two clamping shoes.

1.8
3-jaw chuck (2x 3 Jaws)

4jaw chuck (2 x 4 jaws)

4-jaw independed chuck

For holding of round, triangular and hexagonal workpieces centrically.

For holding of round,
square and octogonal
workpieces centrically.

For holding of workpieces
centrically and eccentrically.

Adaptor plate
To mount 3-jaw, 4-jaw chuck
and independent. The adaptor
plate itself is mounted on
to the milling table.

Intermediate plate
Ti mount 3-jaw, 4-jaw cnuck
and independent. The 'intermediate plate itself is mounted on to the dividing atachment. The dividing attachment is clamped to the millinq
table with two T-nut screws.
Dividing attachment
The Dividing Attachment
Operating tips

TECHNICAL DATA
Diameter of rotary table; 150 mm
Worm reduction:

1:40

T-slots according to factory standard
Number of holes in dividing plates:
27,33,34,36,38,39,40,42
OPERATING ELEMENTS
Clamping levers for rotary table (1):
Clamping levers are Loosened during the
dividing operation itself, but must be
clamped before every machining operation
Indexing pin with handle (2):
During direct dividing from 15° to 15°.
the pin rests into the parameter notoiles
of the rotary table. During indirect dividing (worm dividing) or free dividing
by means of the graduated scale, the Indexing pin must be pulled out and swivelled to the left.
The graduated scale (3) is for controlling the divisions.

2

4

Crank handle with index plunSer (4)
moves the worm which is engaged with
the wormwheel of the rotary table during indirect dividing.
The shears serve to facilitate adding
the number of holes when a fraction of
a turn is to be added.
Disengaging and engaging the worm:

T-slots of the dividing attachment

The alien head screw (5) is loosened.
When the dividing plate is turned counterclockwise, the worm and wormwheel
are disengaged. The rotary table can be
turned by hand for direct indexing. Sy
turning the dividing plate clockwise,
worm and wormwheel are engaged. To facilitate engagement of worm and wormwheel,
the rotary table should be moved slightly by hand.
The alien head screw (5) must again be
retightened.
Types of Dividing

Indirect

dividing:

Direct dividing:

Indirect dividing offers many more dividing possibilities and is more accurate because of the worm reduction of
1:40.
Indirect dividing method:
If the crank handle is turned 40 times,
the rotary table makes 1 revolution
(360°). With help of the dividing
plates, exact fractions of turns can be
executed.

Worm and wormwheel are disengaged.
Possibility 1:
Dividing by means of the indexing pin.
Dividing possibility from 15° to 15°
(i.e., maximum of 24 divisions within
360°).
Possibility 2:
The dividing can be done freely with
the aid of the graduated scale on the
rotary table.

Note
With indirect dividing the indexing pin is
always disengaged. For manufacturing a
workpiece the rotary table has to be fixed.

The

indexing chart:

1st column: indicates number of divisions
per 3600
2nd column: shows the corresponding angle
of the division
3rd column: shows the number of 360 0 crank
handle revolutions which are
necessary
4th column: shows the number of holes to
be added for each index plate
Example of an indirect dividing operation:
Desired division: 13 divisions in 360°
From the indexing table it can be seen
that at the desired division 13, 3 full
crank turns must be made plus a fraction. turn of 3 additions) holes on the
indexing plate 39.

4. Execution of the dividing operation:
3 full turns plus the fractional turn
of the 3 added holes are made; that
means that the plunger is placed in
the black hole. One dividing operation is completed.

Practical execution:

1. The indexing plate with 39 holes is
mounted.
5. Next dividing operation:
The shears are turned until the left
arm touches the pin again; the next
dividing operation follows as described in 4. above.

2, in the indexing table one sees that
at the division 13, 3 full turns plus
3 holes on the 39 plate have to be
added.. Therefore, the shears are fixed
so that they include 4 holes.
NOTE: The shears may not be moved during
the dividing operation, otherwise they
do not serve their purpose as an orientation aid.

3. The indexing plunger is placed in a
hole of the 39 plate (marked black on
the drawing) and the left shear arm
moved until it touches the pin of the
plunger.

NOTE: If a larger number or holes has to
be reached than the maximum opening of
the shears allow, you have to set the
difference of boles between the shears.

Example
21 divisions per 360 0 have to be carried
through. From the chart one can see that
one full turn p lus the fractional turn,
of 38 holes on the disc 42 have to be
carried through. 38 holes cannot he set.
Thus: 42-38=4 holes. When dividing you
make one additional turn (2 turn ailtogether) and turn back the difference of
4 holes (the shears comprise 5 holes).

4 4 el
Formula for the Calculation of the Hole Numbers Required
z No. of divisions required for one revolution of the workpiece.
INDEX TABLE
K No. of revolutions of handle for a complete revolution
for
of the workpiece.
MAXIMAT
n
No. of revolutions of handle for one dividing move: n =
Worm reduction of dividing head 1:40; i. e. K = 40.
,
to. ■
!
I
Amount of holes to be added
Amount of notes to be added
7. I
•Zr1 1
[ .....
as .
w ;
114e o .
for each index plate
for each index plate
0 : , 1 '2.-cr
=
c,
c ' o 1 ,3 0
0
,z, ,444 - o
,
,
th' :• o, 1 °. 6" .1
"'
71 1 8, i c
•2'6: 27! 33 34i 36 38 39 40 42
-a7-' 1 E 1 2.`?:. 27 33 34 36 38 39 40 , 42
4
2 h 18020
10
9
32 1
1 1
201
!
1
1
;
7
: 175 1 . 191 121
33 i
1
1I 170°.,18 1. 24 1'4
34
1 1
.-,-.
-L-,
[
i
.;
1 1
j 160'7117! 21 :
35J
6 ..
1
4
150-1 16 18
36 ; 100/. 1
-4
1
140.": 15: 15 .
2
I
38 '
11
-r--- I 12 i --1-:i
' 130':' 14!
1
39 :
!
125'' 13 1 24 !
40: 9`-' .
110111111111.11111
3 12013" 9 11; ---, 12
40
13
14
1
42 '
III
4 110°--r-- ---1. ,
'.12 6 .
III 30
44 i
--I
r
100°! 11 3 [[
24
45 8 c:
32
i
4._. 4' 90'' 1[ 1 0-ir !
35
t
'
48 :
30
____.
50:
: 80 -- 24
8.
!
'
32
f
-4-76'r : 8 9' 11
L12 '
14
13
7'• , 21
'
28
.
5 ' 72'781
30 •
52
i
d 70"' 7 ' 21 .
i
1
54 i
1... 20
. ! 65 Q71 6 1
-1--,
551
H.
2 1
.
i,
60°–'- 6:it 18 '1 22,
,
26
30
56 '
.
28
55 63 :
'1
18
60 6°
---5 1'
1
7
30
64 '
25
,
:.
.t
:
65 '.
24
:50 5 15 :•
f
,
I
8 1--- 45'-' 51
i
1
1
I
1
20
I
66'.
i.- I--}
• 40', 414 12 1
1
16 :
68
4.:
410 • 36 ,': 4 :1
!
•
7
70 •
24
t---f
11
3:
21 '
'
1
72 ; 5° .__
15
20
•
12 : 30': 3, 9 1 11 '
12 ;
14
13!
76:
20
!
,
131
1
1
1
:31
3'
20
781
4---i-,.
-T4 1,I 36
I 2
r 1[ 1 ,
17 18 19
•
.
:
80
20
4i 25-' 1 22
84
84
•
-r—15 ; 24'1 '; 2!18 :. 22 : 424 ,
t
28 .
26 1i—
85
'
' 16
t 2 IT17 ; 18 ' 19
----Idt
! 20 21
88
15 !
17 •
4.' 2 r ;•
: 12 1
:
12
1
90 4" 1:
4_
I-1-18 [I 20'-' [ 2 1 6 .•
!
. 8 !
95
16 =111
1
t
-1r-19
'
•
1 4
;2
96
15
4.!
11.
'.t
20 ' 1-EV.• ' 2
•
'
100
I
MOEN
'16 • 1 I• 21T .1!_ I.!
9 11 1
13 MIMI
12
3j
—1_
.4-,
f-•
1802r 421 :
! .I
,
i
:
L
.38
1
6
! 8
,
Mil
.
-22 ,
' 1 •. t- 27:
:
200
'
:
8
+
+
_ -4-24 ' 16'-' + 11 18 1: 22 i[
240
!•--k•6
24 '
28
i 26 1
:
Ell
l---25Hr —,-+ ef .{-i, -4.• __i__.. 1,i - -- i
270.
i
--L
:-i .' 4 •
24
t
3601°11
26 F1
1 3!
1 1--4- ':
[
21
' ---t- i.
-1-1
i 40'
;
2
1 ' 13 i
MEIN
,
28
30
18
iL I
2 WIMINININ1
.
'
27
4-- 1- 131
1'
20' '
!
30 1- 1 ' 9 11
2-712 '
14
13
10111111111.11
i:

1

Q)1

1

–

.1

/

--.

,

1 !

'

L

-1---

1

I-

-I-

1

24

1

f

is

:

1

i• •

■-•

i

i

H-

.1

,•

—

1

120

1

!

I

:

• •

1

'

• 4--

.
Chapter 2: Handoperation
— Operating element (survey)
— Positioning of milling cutter
— Traverse indication
— Input of X, Y, Z values
Switching feed motors
"Curventless"

2.2
2.4
2.7
2.8
2.11
Traverse — Hand Operation

Monitor

Display
After switching on the machine, the figure 0 appears. Lamps X,Y or Z are on.

N

X,Y,Z when

G XYZ F

©

D,‘.1 K

M

If you traverse in tX, the lamp X lights
up. When you take your finger from the
key, the traverse distance is shown in
1/100 mm on the VDU. With a distance of
2,45 the display indicates 245.

N

The screen snows zero for
you switch it cn.

With the exception of rapid traverse
the indication is shown continuously
in steps of 0,5 mm.

G XYZ F

ggcoo.9)00
D,J IC

M

245

If you press the Z--key, the light jumps
to the Z-lamp. After you lift your finger from the key , the traverse distance
appears (with 6,28 mm 628 will appear)

N

g0
Doi K

G XYZ F

0 © (o o 6)

628

Minus sign on display

N G XYZ F

(000) © 0

D,J K LT

M

628

XY
-30 -340 250
Input of X, Y, Z Zero-Values from any
chosen Milling Position

The display shou.,,d indicate zero, in
case the milling cutter stands at a
given point (X=0, Y=0, Z=0).
You can program the X,X,Z displays tc
indicate zero.

The milling cutter is at a distance of
22,1.5 mm to the workpiece edge in X.
The display indicates whatever value.
In case the milling cutter traverses
in +X direction by 22,15 mm, then the
display should indicate the value X=0.

N G XYZ F
© (I) 0 0) © 0
T
D,J K

Procedure:
1. The lamp X on the display lights up
2. Press INP - the lamp X flashes

N2 EE

INP
2215
INP

3. Put in the value
(no plus/
minus sign, because the milling cut-.
ter should. indicate with plus "traverse direction 0").
4. Press key INP. The flashing of toe
X--lamp stops.

You can enter the Y,Z values in the
. same way.

When programming minus-values first put
in the figures, then press key minus,

2R
Application of Path Programming
in Hand Operation Mode
Zero point for the dimensionirg is
the workpiece edge. The milling cutter
shall move to this point. The displays
shall be set zero,

Procedure:
1. Scratch surface, set Z-display zero,

2.

Scratch surface in X-direction. Put
in value of milling cutter radius r.

3, Scratch surface in Y-direction. Put
in value of milling cutter radius r.

Note:
You can traverse after scratching as you
iike. If you program the zero-point, you
have to add to the X,X displa y the radius value and put it in..

Exercise:
i.

Program the display X,Y,Z=0 if the
milling cutter is positioned onto
the edge,
Move the milling cutter to the indicated. position.
Switching Feed Motors "Currentless"
When switching on the machine the feed
motors are currentless.
If you.have - in hand- or CNC-operation

mode - moved the slides the feed motors
stay under power.

N

1.0.0
50 r r /(1,C

Switching currentless - with no program
being stored

G XYZ F

O 0 CUD 0 0
K LT M

641 0

300
AOC

INP

H/C

DEL

M

REV
FWD

tip

START

1. Switch to CNC-operation mode: Press
H /C key.
I

2. Press key	
3. Key
VDU.

inE

. The light jumps to G.

. The

rownher appears

4. Press keyilNPI. Now the feed
are switched currentless.

on the

motors

Switching currentless - with a program
being stored
N

G64 is a pure switching function. It is

G XYZ F

O 000
D.J K LT M

64

not stored.

0
H/C

ti4

START

1, Press
on.

key	

so that G light gets

2. When a number appears on the VDU,
press DEL
3. Key in
4. Press

EE

keyra?. Now the feed motors
are switched currentless.
Operating Elements
Control Elements
Hand Operation

NUMERICALLY" CONTROLLED-:.-

1. Main switch

3. Emergency stop button

Turn key to the right. Machine and control part are under power (except emergency stop button is pressed).

Control unit, feed motors and main motor are cut off from power by pressing emergency stop button: turn button
to the left - it will jump back to
orginal position. Main switch has to
be switched on again.

2. Control

lamp main switch

When main switch is on, lamp is on.

'11
4. Switch for main .spindle

12. Control lamp for hand

Turn switch to the right.

13.JH /CLswitch key:
operation

5. Turning knob for speed control of
main spindle
6. Ammeter
Shows power consumption of main spindle
motor. In order to protect motor
against overload, the power consumption
should not surpass 2 A with 220-240 V
or 4 A with 100-110 V.
7. Feed keys for longitudinal, cross and
vertical slide
8. Rapid traverse

key

If keys for feed and rapid traverse are
pressed together, then the relative
slide will move with rapid traverse.
speed.
9. Turning knob for setting the feed
rate
10. Inch/metric switch and switch for
changing the axis system
11. Digital read-out

for slide movement

i X, t Y, ± Z are shown in 1/100 mm
or 1/1000 inch.
Plus movement without sign
Minus movement by a light beam

125
X -1,25 mm or -0.125 inch

operation

hand operation/CNC

If you press the(H/Clkey the light of
the control lam p hand operation will
jump to CNC operation (operation mode:
CNC). Bypressing the key once again
the . light will jump back (operation
mode: nand operation).
14. DEL key
The X,Y,Z values are set to zero.
15. Thel-4. key
lkey ycu can switch from
With thei
X to Y to Z without movement of slides.
16. The INP key
With the INPI key you enter the values
for slide movements.
17. M-key
Activates switching exits.
•

Hand Operation F1-CNC
Positioning of the Milling Cutter

1. Scratching front sides and top side
With milling most measuremen-zs refer
:)uter edges. In order to use the measurements of the technical drawing you have
tc, "zero-set" the display and use as reference/starting point the outer edges.

Example
Milling cutter with dia. to mm.
Move milling cutter in Z-direction
until you scratch surface slightly.
Set. Z-display to zero (press key
DEL),

Scratch front side in X-direction..
- Set X-display to zero (press key DEL)

X Y
0

-

Scratch. front side

in

Y-direction.

Set Y-display to zero (press key DEL)
Zerasetting of Display to Zero Point
of Dimensioning (Example: Milling)

Example: Milling of groove
- The groove is milled using a 3 mm
cutter.
- Zero point for the dimensioning
is the workpiece edge and surface.
- The. measures refer to the center of
the milling cutter.

X=0/ Y=0

Consequence
Move axis of milling cutter to edge of
workpiece.
a) Scratching of all 3 surfaces and zero-setting of X,Y,Z.

N G XYZ F
©CD(530)(DO
T M
D,J K
4001
DEL
•

G XYZ F
(DO
CD
D,J K T M

0

b) Move by value of milling cutter
radius into X-direction. Set X to
"zero".
c) Move mill, cutting by value of milling cutter radius into Y-direction.
Set display to "zero",

N G XYZ F
©(p01;) ©
D,J K TM

400

•

DEL
NO XYZ F
D

K

TM

Exercise
Move milling cutter such that all dlsplay values are at "zero".

Exercise
Mill a recess as in drawing. Enter the
following values:
Spindle sped
S (rpm)
Feed mm/min
Infeed in X (mm)
Infeed. in Z (mm) !
Pay attention to set correct feed.

A

1
Chapter 3

CNC-Operation Survey
—

Operating and control elements

— Preparatory functions,
miscellaneous-/Switching functions
Artarm signs
— Possible inputs
— Operation CNC
Operation magnetic tape

3,2 - 3.3
3.4 - 3.5
3.6
3.7
3.9
0

ra
uNu-uperauon tQurvey)

Operating Elements
Control Elements
CNC-Operation

1. Main switch with removable 'Key, Memory is being cleared when switching
off,
2. Control lamp shows the power supply
• of machine and control unit.
Emergency stop button with interlock.

Unlocking of button: turn button to
the left. To switch on machine, turn
main switch to zero and. to 1 again.
When switching off also memory will

be cleared.

4. Optional switch .for axis system and
for metric or inch mode of operation.
CNC-Operation (Survey)

5. Switch for main spindle

11. Keys for program input, correction,
storing of program on tape, V24
operation etc. (see detailed explanations)

Position 1 (main spindle ON, without M03)
Position CNC: main spindle is
switched on by programming M03 and
switched off by M05, M06 (with F*0)
and M30.
6. Ammeter
7. Magnetic tape
switch key
Manual/CNC operation
9. Control lamp CNC operation
10.1-HAW-IT-key
The program is being worked off

11.1. Number keys 0 -1791
I1.2..7 The minus sign key
-7
To enter minus values the minus
sign E] has to be pressed after
input of numbers.
11.3. INP1 key (INPUT = storing)
Storing key

12. VDU (display)7
Indicates values for address letters
and modes of operation

11.4.1DEL1 key (DELETE = erase)
Erasing key

13. Control lamp address letters

11.5.1FWD1 key (FORWARD)
Program jumps forward block by
block

14. Control of milling spindle speed

11 .6 .

key (REVERSE)
Program jumps backwards block by
block

11.7. H.] Arrow•key
Display jumps word by word
11.8, ld key: key for entering of miscellaneous functions.
CNC-Operation (Survey)

Survey
Preparatory Functions, G-Codes

G 00

Rapid traverse

047

Add tool radius twice

V: N3/G00/X±5/Y±4/Z±5
10/G47

H: N3/G00/X14P1±5/Zi5.

G 01

Linear interpolation

G48

Subtract

tool radius twice

V N3/COI/X±5/Y-174/Z±5/F3
N3/G4S
H: W3/G0i/X-1-4/Y:S/Zi-5/F3

G 02

Circular interpolation clockwise

GO-3

Circular interpolation counterclockwise
Quadrants:
m.3iG02/
Y:
X--',/Y-14/Z±5iF3
GO.'

G64

Feed motors without current.
(switching function)

G65

Magnetic tape operation
(switching function)

N3/M)9/J2/K2 (Partial circles)

1■13/G65

004 Dwell
N3/G04

0 66

Activating RS 232 Interface
115/G6;::

G21

Empty block.
N3/G21

•072 Pocket milling cycle
V: N3/GT2/Xf5/Y14/Z:F3

025 ' Sub-routine program call
•
143/G25/1_,;17 ) 3

H: N3/G72/X1t41YI5

74 Thread-cutting

G27 Jump instruction

N3/G74/10/Z/F3

143/G27/L (F)
(;414)

Tool radius compensation cancelled
N3/G40

G45 Add tool radius
NJ/G45.

G46

Subtract tool radius
NJ/G46

cycle

(left-hand)

081

Fixed boring cycle

N3/G61/Z15/F3

082 Fixed boring c y cle with dwell
N3/G82/Z-3/F3

G83 Fixed boring cycle with chip
removal
N3/G83/2/F3
CNC-Operation (Survey)

G 84

Ggm Incremental value programming

Thread-cutting cycle

N3/091
N3/064/1(3/7,-5/F3

G85

92 Offset of reference

Fixed reaming cycle

V: N3/G92/X5/Y24/Zf5

N3/G85/Z-S/F3

H: N3/092/X14/Y1-5/Z-5

G89

Fixed reaming

cycle with

dwell

N3/G89/Z15/F3

G90

Absolute value programming

V = Vertical.
H = Horizontal

N3/090

Miscellaneous or Switching Functions

MOO - Dwell
N3/M00
M03 - Milling spindle ON, clockwise
N3/M03
M05 - Milling spindle OFF
N3/M05
M06 - Tool offset, milling cutter radius input
N3/M06/D5/S4/Z± 5/T3
M17 - Return to main program
N3/M17
M08
M09
M20
M21

M22

Switching exits
N3/M2

M23

M26 - Switching exit - impulse
N3/M26/H3
M.30 - Program end
N3/M30
M99 - Parameters circular interpolation
(in connection with G02/03)
N3/M99/J3/K3
Alarm Signs

A00: Wrong G/M code
A1:

Wrong radius / M99

A2:

Wrong Z-value

A3:

Wrong F-value

A4:

Wrong Z-value

A5:

M30 code missing

A6:

M03 code missing

A7:

No significance

A8:

Tape end with cassette operation
SAVE

A9:

Program not found

A101 Writing protection
All: Loading mistake
Al2: Checking mistake
A13: Inch/ run switching with full program memory
A14: Wrong mill head position/path in•
/M or---H/M
crement with LOAD
A15: Wrong Y-value
A16: Value of milling cutter radius
missing
A17: Wrong sub-routine
A18: Path milling cutter compensation
smaller zero

3.6
CNC-Operation (Survey)

Possible inputs
(Otherwise alarm signs)

Inch

Metric
Values

Values

Unit (mm)

Unit (inch)

1/1000"

Xv

0-19999

1/100 mm

0-7999

XR

0-9999

1/100 mm

0-3999

YV

0-9999

1/100 mm

0-3999

1/1000"

YR

0-19999

1/100 mm

0-7999

1/1000"

ZVH

0-19999

1/100 mm

0-7999

1/1000"

Radii

0-9999

1/100 mm

0-3999

1/1000'

D(X) milling cutter
radius with MO6

0-9999

1/100 mm

0-3999

1/1000"

F

2-499

mm/min

2-199

1/10"/min

T(F) tool address
M06

0-499

0-199

1

1

L(F) jump instructions

0-221

H(F)

0-999

exit signs M26

J/K circular parameter

0-90

Adresses
N, G, X, Y, Z, F, D, J, K, L, M, T, S, H

.

1/1000"
CNC-Operation (Survey)

Operation CNC

LINPI Storing of word contents

[DEL Deleting of word contents
FWD.] Forward in program block by block
GREVI

Backward in program block by block

HI1, 1

Forward in block word by word

lM

Input of M-functions

Program hold:

FWD]

1INP

Program interruption

LINP

RE vj

Delete program
LDELi+ INP ]
First DEL; then INPi

Operation — Magnetic tape
Storing of program on tape
G65

Fiicril --

number —

FWD

I INPj

Put in program

r--7

LDELIremains pressed.
Delete alarm
REV!

INP1

Insert block
ry

fi

IINP

Transmit program from tape to memory

Select program

G65INP
number --b. iINP1

Delete tape contents
G65

Delete block
+DEId
Single block mode

T

3

etc. +1STARTI

Testrun:
1M

1

+
Chapter 4
CNC-Basics
4.1

CNC-lathe - The control
CNC-machine - Main elements
What happens in CNC-manufacture

4.2 - 4.3
4.4 - 4.7

Differences in manufacture using a
handoperated or a CNC-machine
This you are going to learn

4.8 - 4.9
4.11

What is programming
The coding standards

4.13 - 4.15
4.17 - 4.19

4.21 - 4.23
Program structure
4.25
GOO/G01
Description of path lengths for slide movements 4.27
The CNC-program (structure)
4.29
The address words of the program
sheet F1-CNC
Standardization of axis systems
for CNC-machines
Concept of programming Methods of programming
Dimensions of drawings
The modes of programming
G90/G91

4.31 - 4.33
4.35 - 4.41
4.43
4.45
4.47
4.49 4.51
Determining the coordinates for
programming in absolute mode

4.53 - 4.55d

information to the control concerning
4.57
the workpiece zero-point
Fixing the origin of the coordinates on the
4.59
F1-CNC (workpiece zero-point)
Fixing the zero-point of coordinates with
G92 - Programmed offset of
4.61 - 4.69
reference point
Various workpiece zero-points
4.71 - 4.73
in one program
4.75 - 4.77
Mixed programming
Connection: G92 - Zero-point offset/
M06 - Tool lengths compensation

4.79

4.81 - 4.83
Some tips for procedure
4.85 4.87
The M-functions
4.89
Description of block formats
Types of controls of CNC machine tools 4.91 - 4.97
4,99 - 4.143
Programming - Geometry
CNC-Lathe
The Control

What ist a CNC-lathe?
- A machine which we feed with figures
and letters
= DATA INPUT
- A. machine which "understands" the data
which processes it and calculates.
= DATA PROCESSING
- A machine which passes on this calculated data in form of instructions,
= EXECUTION
- A machine which follows the instruction

Meanings in daily use
Tne meanings change quite often in
their daily use. NC-machines were originally machines with numerical control,
but no microprocessor. Today such machines are obsolete. The program was
read in directly from the perforated
tape.

Today NC-machines comprise all types
CNC, ANC or AC types.
CNC-machine - Main elements

CNC — Machine — Main Elements —
A "humanized" Comparsion

Data Input:
Via keys or magnetic tape

interface element
can be compared to
a secretary

Output element:
Lets call him
press speaker.
Central Processing Unit
Microprocessor. Let's
call it the director.
He delegates, takes decision, calculates.
A watch gives him the
feeling for time, but
he does not have any
specialist knowledge.

Operating program
(EPROM)..

Memory HAM
Remembers the
program

specialists.
They know
everything.
Output element (Interface): Chief operator
He receives orders and
passes them on.

Amplifier (foreman)
CNC-machine — Main elements

CNC-Machine — Main Elements
Digital read-out

Data Input

Central processing
unit = Microprocessor
(Director)
Output e ement
(press speaker)

Operating program =
EPROMS (Specialists)

Output element
Interface
(Chief operator)

Amplifier
(foreman)
What happens in CNC-Manufacture

3. specialist ---4■Director:

,Data input

"Yes, o.k."

I Data processing / Data storing]

4. Director ----opMempry:
"Please give me the data!"
5. Memory

Data outputj

–lb-Director:

X,Y slides have to be moved in ratio
1 : 4.
In the computer nothing happens without
the director. There is a strict
hierarchy.
What

happens

1. Secretary

if you press the key START?

6. Director calculates and gives data
to chief operator. With the aid of
the watch he also determines the operating speed (when threading he
waits for the main spindle position).

1.Director:

"They pressed START!"
Director asks memory:
"Did they put in program end M30?"

7. Chief op erator ----III-Foreman:
Move X slide with feed size F1 and
Y slide with feed size F2.

If yes, the program can start.
2. Director ----ipSpecialists:
We want to machine a groove in a
certain angle.

4.4

8. Director ----Ili-Press speaker:
"The block is finished. We work on the
next. Let them know!"
What happens in CNC-manufacture?

What happens in CNC-Manufacture?
Digital read-out

Data Input

VI El a
fll
MI

Central processing
unit = Microprocessor
(Director)
Output element
(press speaker)

Interface element
(secretary)

1111.:
rneria
46.4r4k.
er (r)

-1;;;V ..00
:00"

Operating program =
EPROMS (Specialists)

CNC-Machine

Memory = RAM

utput element
What happens in CNC-Manufacture

What happens in CNC-Manufacture
What knowledge is necessary in order to manufacture, using a hand operated or a CNC lathe?

Hand operated machine

NC-machine
CNC machine - handoperated machine

Differences in Manufacture using a hand
operated or a CNC-Machine
(Survey)
Hand operated machine

Necessary information
Technical. drawing

Necessary means
Lathe

Chucking devices

V

Tools

Necessary knowledge/Capabilities
(to execute operation;

Reading 3f technical drawings

Knowledge abo..it tocl. geometry
CNC machine - handoperated machine

Differences in manufacture, using a hand operated
or a CNC-machine - continued

and operated machine

NC-machine

Technological information
+ Cutting speed depending on
- material of workpiece
- tool (HSS, carbide tipped)
type of operation

+ Feed rate
+

Cutting depth

* Performance and. dimensions
of machine

Execution

Operator must know how
to control the machine

Writing the NC-program
•

1-,_I
.

a	

.

1
.
-1-- +

-.	

I-

!

•

J.	

.	

-

i

•

J.2:

4...

--,-•

_,__

!

j

•
.:

Remarks

F.---1.-

—

— -•-

••

____A
--J.

1

E
i
• -. i-...---r

-

-• ±- •

-

,.i___

1

.,	

.._

.-It	

■-.-

-I-

+ Input of NC-program

+ Preparing the machine
+ Execution

!

1
.1
This you are going to learn
A rough survey
Set up a CNC-program
Enter all informations into program
sheet.
Rules how to write these datd have
to be learned.

Put in program
You have to put in the information
into the control. The control stores
the information. You have to follow
certain rules.

V

Give instruction to manufacture
The control works with the information entered - it calculates and
gives instructions to the machine
tool.

Check result
Correct program
Improve (optimize)
program.

411
Programming

What is Programming?
Prog ramming means to feed the computer
with such data which it understands.
In other words, we have to "spoon-feed'
the computer, List the data in orderly
sequence and in a Language which is fami;_iar to the computer, which it understands, so that it can process the information.

The operator does not understand the
Chinese commands, because he does not
speak this language.

The CNC-machine does not understand the
human language.

We have to feed the CNC-machine with
data in a language it will understand.
This language is "encoded".
Do you already know programming?

It you have operated a machine tool you
automatically carried out the right
movements.
Your brain gave instruction to your
hands to operate the switches and :,evers in the correct sequence.
This lob was automized to a large extent.
When programming you have to wrice down
all instructions.

The instructions and informations
must be
- in a systematic sequence
- complete
- and accurate.
They are given to the CNC-machine in
a coded form.
4.15
Coding

The Coding Standards
The program structure for numerically
controlled machine tools:
The program structure for numerically controlled machine tools:
How to code informations and instructions
is defined by standards.

The standards are:
- Program structure for numerically controlled machine tools.
- According to DIN 66o25 (German Industrial Standards)
- According to'ISO 1056 (International
Standard), new edition ISO 6983.

HOVE LONGITUDINAL SLIDE 410mIn TO THE LEFT 200nint/min
111111111111•0
411111111.1116

N.— /601 /x+40

F2011

The coding rules must be learned by you

so that you can write the program for
the manufacture.
Coding

The Coding of informations and Instructions
(Criteria)
One cculd build a computer . which coderstands instructlons Ln normal. language.
This would bring about qu to some disadvantaces:

Language information

:Criteria

Move the longitudinal slide
- main spindle being switched
on - with a civen feed a
distance of 25 mm at an angle

1 It would be necessary to
build -a computer for
each language (or even
for each sLang)
The long instructions
are complicated and
vague.
:3 The language is practice
oriented. This should
also be true for CNC-instructions.
4 The code should be applicable to many different machine types.

• Demands for -toding

- Language neutral

Simple coding
Clear expression

- Practice-oriented

- Universally applicable

When setting up standards for the program
structure of CNC-machines the aim of the
many experts was to create codes for instruction which should be
-

as short as possible
simple
language neutral
practice-oriented
applicable to all machines.
Program structure

Program Structure
Coding of the movements
Introduction of the Carthesian Coordinates
System.

Write down the instruction which you
would have to give for milling. The
milling spindle is on.
Number the instructions consecutively.

VERTICAL SLIDE

CROSS SLIDE
Coding of slide movements

The Instructions
, Move the vertical slide downwards

The movements are described using the
axis denomination of the Carthesian
Coordinates System.

(15 mm )

For vertical mills

Move the longitudinal slide to the
left '50 mm)

X-movement: longitudinal slide
Y-movement: cross slide
Z-movement: vertically

:3 Move the cross slide forward (30 mm)
are neither short nor language-neutral
nor simple.

Instruction on direction
is achieved using ± sign.

Coded instructions
-Z
2

3

15 mm
50 mm

-Y

30 mm

4.23
GOO/G01

The movement 1 is different to movements
2 and 3,

Movements 2 and 3

Movement 1

StraLght movement and chit removal

No chip removal
Feed rate has to be set (depending on
cutter dia., raw material, depth of
cut etc.).

Speed as large as possible.

Coding:

Coding

Rapid traverse = GOO

Linear interpolation = GO1

N

X
II

_ .

(J)

;0)

(K)

Y

{S)

.. _
'"

0
• . .
•

00
0

5a0

•

3000

1

0
r01611 1.1011V1111.0

Description of Path Lengths for
Slide Movements
Also in this case simple arrangements
are made. The statement 'mm'
meter) is left out. Only the number is
written.
X -45,325 means: traverse -45,325 mm
in X-direction.

On the F1-CNC path lengths are pro•
grammed without decimal point in
1/100 mm or 1/1000 inch.
Thus, 23,25 mm is programmed 2325 and
1,253 inch is programmed 1253.

Sign
Measures without signs are automaticaJly "+" measures.

The Program Sheet
All informations and instructions are
entered into the program sheet. Further
explanations on the following page.

N

G
(M)

Y

X
(J)

fp)

(K)

(S)

a

00

F
m

OA)

remarks

4 27
External construction

The CNC-Program (structure)
The program is wrLtten down in the pro. gram manuscript.

Y
(K) (S)

G
(M)

(J)

00

Do

-3

0
2
03
04

•
•
•
►

2 00o

OS

ra

z

0

X.
(0)

N

C
0

r

on

- 2 Soo

0

F

(L) (T) (H)

420
120

r

oso

0

-

100

'168o

120
12o

2000
5So

1S-0o

The program manuscript
All essential data for the manufacture
of a workpiece are filled in.
The composition of this program is
called programming.
The structure of such a program is
standardized.

Parts of a program

N

(_,

V

X

(MI

;.-I}

oc

;.0

-3 000

01
0:.

2i
Di

10 So

(5

N1

(K)

I

•

•

F
(L)(T) (H)

o

- 2 COO

_0

42o

o
68o

0
400

12 0

Y
•.K. (S)

T

•

0

-

X
IJ)

ISI

C

0

03 ,_ Q')

N

ID)

!DI

120

F
(L) m 0-

fP

o

P. 1_,_Qt
01

10S7

0

- 3 00

00

02

0

- 2 .5- oo

0

1

o

0

42o

'0

1. The block
The program consists of blocks. A block
contains all data necessary to execute
order: move longituan operation
dinal sl.'_de straight or. 25 mm, speed
120 mm/min).

2. The words
Each. block consists of various words.
Each word consists of a letter and a
combination of numbers, e.g. N01.

42D

words
3. The word

G 01
Address

Combination
of numbers

A word consists of a letter and a combination of numbers. The letter is
called address.
The Address Words of the Program Sheet/Fl -CNC

X

G
(M)

N

1J) (0)

III

G
CO )

N

G
(M)

(J)

N

G
(M)

X
(J) SD)

)
(M)

(J;

N

1

.

x
(J)

X

X

(K)

Y

IS)

Y
(D)

(0)

DI

(K)

(K)

(K)

Y

Y

F
(1) IT) (H)

Z

(K)

Y

Z

(5)

(9) .

(5)

f
(1.) (T) (14)

Z

F
6.14THFI)

Z

F
(1-1 .r-) (H).

Z

F
IL) (T) (H)

1. The N-address:
N = abbreviation of number
The instructions and informations are
numbered. We talk about block number.
On the Fl-CNC: N000 up to N221.

2. The G-address:
Into this column we enter the key information, i.e. the 0-function or preparatory function. You will get to
know the various G-functions in the
course of our exercises.
3. The X,Y,Z-addresses:
They are the columns for the path data.
F1-CNC:
The paths are programmed without.decimal point in 1/100 mm and/or 1/1000".

4. The F-address:
F stands for "feed". For each chip removal movement the appropriate feed has
to be programmed.
F1-CNC:
The feed is programmed in mm/min or 1/10
inch/min.

5. The M-address:
M stands for "miscellaneous".
M-functions are called "auxiliary functions". The M-values are entered into
the 0-column.

4.31
External construction

N

N

N

N

N

.G
( M)

G

(M)

G
(M)

G
(M)

G
(M)

I..1)

(J)

X
(D)

(D)

(K)

(D)

X

(K)

(K)

X
(J)

X
(D)

(J)

(J)

X

(D)

(K)

(K)

IS)

'X

Y

Y

Y

(S)

(S)

(S)

(S)

Z

Z

Z

z

Z

F
(L) (T) (H)

F
(1) (T) (H)

F
I.) Cr) (H)

F
L) (T) (H)

F
L.) (T) (H)

6. The D-address:
The cutter radius is described ander D.
Radius 5 mm--4,-D 500 (compare M06 Tool
compensation).

7. The S-address:
S stands for speed.
2000 rpm---S 2000 (compare M06)-

3. The T-address:
T stands ±or tool.
Tool number 2--0-T02 cornpare tooi. lengths
:7.ompensation).

9. The 0,K-addresses:
3,K are parameters for circle oroqramniF,g.
These addresses are described in chapter
G02/G0.3.

10. The L-address:
is a jump address; compare G2.5, G27.
MAIM al awcy

Standardization of Axis Systems for CNC-Machines
The axis systems are standardized for the
various types of machinery according to
ISO 841 and DIN 66217. The basis is the
Carthesian Coordinates System (clockwise).
The right-hand rule can be . of quite some
help: it shows the position of the axes
to one another.

Making Programming Easier
Mix-ups are quite common when programming X,Y,Z and the +/- directions.
So even quite experienced programmers
use auxiliary devices. Use the model_
of the coordinates system and you will
commit less mistakes.

IF)
Axis systems

Axis System Milling Machines
Milling machines and machining centers are
of different construction typologie.

Example:
Vertical mill type 1
Milling head with tool moves.
The mounted workpiece carries out longitudinal and cross movements.

11111111"*'411111
Vertical mill type 2
Milling head with cutter is fixed.
The mounted workpiece carries out lo • gitudinal; cross and vertical movements.
Jr11,11.11.0 vsy /011•■■• • 1.0

Description of Cutter Path
If you would have to directly describe the
slide movements, it would need a continuous
rethinking with the various different machine
construction types.
Example: Drilling a hole
Type. 1: Move milling head downwards.
Type 2: Move vertical slide upwards.
A confusing situation.

Thus, the important simple statement
for CNC-machines!
The path of the cutter is described.
For the programming it is all the same, whether
the slides or the tool move during manufacture.

4 39
Axis systems

Axis System
Vertical Mills

Axis system
Horizontal mills

Milling programs on vertical or horizontal mills are different. The Zaxis is always the main spindle axis.
A minus Z-movement is always a feedin movement into the workpiece (e.g.
drilling).
Program sTruciure

Concept of Programming - Methods of Programming
Basically there are two methods to describe the path: absolute or incremertal_

The path infora:itiori is ,Iveh fr-:i a
zero reference point..

Each point (place) is the reference
point (place) for the following measurements.

A Aq
Dimensions of Drawings
There are different types of dimensioning
in technical drawings.

Incremental dimensioning

Absolute dimensioning

Starting point for the dimensioning of
the next point is always the actual.
point which was described last.

Zero-point for the dimensioning of ail
points is a remaining fixed point.

A

O

1

LIO

15

Mixed dimensioning
In most technical drawings you find both
types of dimensioning. Some measures are
given from one common point (absolute) or
in the incremental mode (from the actual
point described last).

or)

15

63
144IJ*4J1 (Vii t ono vo Ile.oa. • Imam

The Modes of Programming
rt

was the aim to achieve a very simple
description of the traverse movements.
You can program the points and traverse
movements in two different modes - so to
avoid changing of dimensions in the
drawing.

To instruct the computer how to calculate the values it is necessary to give
a. key information.
This is achieved by a G-instruction.

G91

G90
-

- Absolute mode description
- Absolute mode programming (reference
point programming)

- Incremental mode programming

N

N

X
(M)

(D)

z

Incremental mode description

(M)

X
(J) (D)

Y

(S)

z

fi){T)(H)

(L) (T) (H)

- You describe point 1 starting from
point 0.

- You start from one point and describe
all other points.
- The zero-point of the coordinates system can be defined by you.

— You describe point 2 starting from
point 1.
- You describe point 3 starting from
point 2, etc.
You have to imagine the coordinates system shifted into the relative point.

4.47
G901G91

When do you have to give the G90/G91 information
to the computer?
The initial status of a CNC-machine
••■••••■■••■••■•

When you switch on the main switch the
machine is in mode of operation "hand
operation" = initial status.

N G X YZ F

ooarroo
D.J K L.7 M
j

7 8 9{
4 5
6.ra

:INP

0

If you press the IVCIkey, the mode of
operation is switched to 'CNC-operation".

H/C

M
Ft-4

The "initial status" of the control is
incremental. All traverse movements
are calculated in incremental mode.

G90 — Absolute value programming

G91 — Incremental value programming

G90 has to be programmed.

You may program G9I, however it is not.
necessary since the control calculates
incrementally by itself.

111

(J) X ( 0 )

NY (S)

1111 MC;

(H)

N

G
(M)

X
(•4

(0)

Y
(K)

(S)

z

F
(L) (T) (H)

Q34

111.

NM=

BB

VIM erns 111 fa L

111
MO

1
I-

G90 is a self-maintaining modal function.
It is valid until it is revoked, i.e.
until G91 is programmed.

4 trOKrewentat

I
P

.Cloict-i-t2
11--

G91 is a self-maintaining modal function.
G91 is revoked by G90.
411015414!ge,

Exercise

Exercise

Exercise

Describe points P1, P2, P3, P4, P5
as absolute data.

Describe points PI, P2, P3, P4, P5
as incremental data.

Write in block N000 the information for
the mode of programming.

N

IM)

X
(.1) (0)

(K) (S)

z

(1-)(T)(

II

X
N
(J1 (0)

II

Y

ME
(K)

15)

Z

F
0..)11

4.51
Workpiece zero-point

Determining the Coordinates for Programming
in Absolute Mode

Determining the Workpiece zero-point in
the technical drawing
In technical drawings the measures are
often taken from one reference point.
For programming it is convenient that
as many measures as possible can be
taken over from the drawing - without
calculation work.
You as programmer can determine the
zero-point of the workpiece. The ideal
choice can best be seen in the workpiece drawing.

Symbol

Short
description
wornpieue ici

WWwit u

- Where to set the workpiece zero-ooint
is your own decision.
- Pay attention to the signs

of the axis.

- Write axis signs and ± signs in t:_ne
drawings not described.

f

4 flflA

a
Workpiece zero-point
The origin of the coordinates system'can
be positioned in any point.
Points may be positioned in any of the 8
squares.
Describe the points in absolute and incremental mode.

X - Y plane = Underneath side of workpiece

Incremental

Absolute

N

z

(L) (t) (N)
YV VI

1Wir

Ur

14-1.0%,11 I R

X - Y Plane in Center of Body

incremental

Absolute
N

0
(M)

(J) (D)

(K)

Y

(S)

(L) M (H)

F
M (H)

4 :qin
Workpiece zero-point

Informations to the Control concerning
the Workpiece zero-point
You. can instruct the control with G90/
-G91 how it should calculate the movements - in absolute or incremental mode.

Absolute value programming
Where is the origin of the coordinates
system situated?

The control unit of a CNC-machine can
neither see nor think.
- It does not know the position of the
work.piece mounted to the slide.
- It cannot read the technical drawing
and thus cannot know the position of
the workpiece zero-point chosen by
you.

CNC-solution:
We have to instruct the control where
we want the origin of coordinates.
IrsorKpluutt zero-point

Fixing the Origin of the Coordinates on the Fl -CNC
(Workpiece zero-point)
w
Possibility 1:
Fixing with G90
If the computer receives a G90 instruction in the course of the program, it
considers the actual slides position
as zero-point.
In the left side mentioned situation you.
could not take any workpiece measures
from the drawing. You would have to
calculate.
This is only useful if you shift the
origin of the coordinates system to
the workpiece zero-point.

Example:
You move the cutter to the zero-point
chosen by you. If the cutter is in
this position you program G90. The origin of the coordinates is set.

A
G92

Fixing the Zero-point of Coordinates with G92
G92 - Programmed offset of reference point

- We have set the workpiece zero-point,

- The cutter position is known to you
(distance workpiece zero-point to
cutter).

Information to computer with G92
You describe the cutter position looked
at from the workpiece zero-point. In
this way you fix the workpiece zeropoint selected by you.

Attention:
Format G92
N3/G921X ± 5/Y ± 4/Z ± 5
(vett kal)
N3/G92/X ±4/X ± 5/Z + 5
(horizontal)

- G92 is an information, no instruction
to traverse,
- G92 means automatically absolute

value programming.
- The zero-point of the workpiece can be
set off with G92 within a program as
often as wanted.
Exercises

Program the workpiece tero-point
Program. the tool to the workpiece zeropoint.

N

N

X

G
(M)

G
IN}

I

-•-

4-

'1'

(D)

ti)

(K)

Z

f

X

j"(

..,t1i

-1-•

(S)

j

i

X

i S)

Z

F
'Li 0":i (F11

F
f t..) IT)

(HI

4

I
--.I--

1

4.63
G92

Exercises
Program the worispiece zero-point

Program the indicated traverse paths.

G
(M)

N

(J1

Y

X
(0)

(K)

1S)

2

F.
(L)(T)l-i
i1

-1--

i_.,

.

Be
Exercises
Program the worIcp iece zero-oint

Program the :ndicated traverse paths.

4.67
G92

Exercises
Program the workpiece zero-point

Program the indicated traverse paths.

G
(N)

1111111111
MN
11111111
0
111111.11
lill

X
(J) (D)

Y
(K) (S)

Z

F
(L) I T ) (H)

11

MI
111
Various Workpiece Zero-Points in one Program

Wi : G92 / x -,2A0o 1
Wy :

/ 2. 1700
x -$700 / y -2600/ z 3500
y aQ

Example:
By a new programming of the workpiece
zero-point the previous workpiece zeropoint is cancelled.

- W1 Ls programmed. Plane 1 is worked
on.
- Traverse cutter to starting position,

Sometimes it is easier for the programming to set various workpiece zeropoints within one program.

- W2 is programmed. Plane 2 is worked
on.

Note:
In mose cases it is best to program the
reference point offset from one and the
same point so that the program stays
distinct.

4:71
G92

Exercises
Program the zero-points and the paths
indicated.
Mixed Programming
You may change also within one and the
same program the programming mode from
absolute to incremental. and vice-versa.

0
4.75
Mixed programming

Programming of the originally
fixed workpiece zero-point

If you want to fix the originally programmed workpiece zero-point you have
to either
• move the tool into the original workpiece zero-point and then program
G90
or
• describe from the original workpiece
zero-point the actual cutter position.
WI 40 iftr! r

■•■

r

Connection:
G92 - Zero-point offset
M06 - Tool lengths compensation

M06

G92

The fa information is an incremental target information within an independent coordinates system.

With G92 you fix the origin of the coordinates system.

4.79
Example

4. Setting up the program:
Carry out offsetting of workpiece 2 hzero-point

Manufacture
1. Mounting the workpiece

We assume that you have to manufacture
a few workpieces of same shape. You
mount the workpiece such that it is always in the same position on the ma chine table.
- The machine vice is clamped.
- In Y-- direction the workpiece remains
always in same position because of
the unmovable jaw.
- In X-direction by a stop,
- In 2-direction by identical spacers.
2. You scratch the three reference surfaces and move the tool to the program start point (= program end

point, = tool change point).
Some tips for procedure

1. Determining the workpiece zero-point
in the drawing:
You can see in your workpiece drawing
what the best position for the work-

piece zero-point will be. You determine
the workpiece zero-point in your drawing.

2. Determining the starting point of
the program.

I

.

dke..-

,

I

•

'

'

■gt.....:.or... Zii.r■••

I

....../ .,
,
■

f
I

,

1

_*

;,T,

L? a.i
.. ' .
.

.

1.

(

!

f'•

!

.

id

I

n

I
)

'
1

11

d

4a

= 7:

20

into a data sheet if more tools are

go

used.

F
t

0,}
44v0

Hz

0

t

o

5
2a00

16

3. Measuring of tools - Putting in data

8
2000

430 1-320

HZK .

4.81
M-Functions

The Miscellaneous or Switching Functions
M-Functions
Switching operations are programmable too on
CNC-machines. The M-address is used to program
chem. The word for the miscellaneous functions
contains a 2-digit key number.

Extract from codes for miscellaneous functions
(DIN 66025, part 2)

1-Miscell i
Haneous •

! Miscell
aneous

Meaning

Function

M04

M10

Programmed stop
1

MO2
MO3

Meaning

Function

MOO
MO1

I

1

Mu ,
r M1

Optional (planned) stop
End of program

1

Spindle clockwise
Spindle counterclockwise

! Clamp

-1

1

Unclamp .

: M30

End of program

Oriented spindle stop

I
Interlock bypas s

M3
M31

MO5

Spindle off

M48

MO6

Tool change

M49

MO7

! Coolant, no. 2 ON

msa	

Constant speed oh

I MOB

Coolant no, 1 ON

M59

Constant. speed off

Coolant off

M60

MO9

I

Workpiece change

All key numbers not mentioned are temporarily
or permanently available. The manufacturer
of the control can assign the key numbers to
a given function.

--1
M-Functions

Miscellaneous or Switching Functions
on the F1-CNC

INN

X (J D)

EMI
SIM

V (K,S)

N G XYZ F
0000►00
D,JK LT M

Programming
The M key numbers are entered into the
G-colmn.
So if there is a M-key number to be entered always add the letter M.

0
Input of M-values
Press M-key then put in number value.

-/14 Lti
F

M-Functions in standard version on
F1-CNC
MOO - Programmed stop
M30 - Program end with re-set
M06 - Tool lengths compensation
Tool data
Tool change
M17 - Jump back instruction
M99 - Circle parameter

M-Functions with the 0NC-interface
(accessory)
M03 - Spindle clockwise
Spindle counterclockwise
MO5

MO8
MO9
M2 9

7

i

L_

M29
M22
M23 J

For details compare chapter 7

Freely available M - functions
Description of Block Formats

•

Depending on the G-functions you have to
program different. addresses (enter. values
for N,X,Y.,Z,F,M,T,D,S,L,J,K into the columns):
For a better overview the single prescriptions are abbreviated.

1. You need a block number N
This block number can be 3-digit.
Abbreviation: N3
2. The G--address
The G-address has two decades; it determines which addresses have to be programmed.
3. X,Y,Z-addresses
X,Y,Z addresses may have
Vertical milling machine:
X ±5, Y t 4, Zt5
Horizontal milling machine
Yt 5, Z±4 )

±

signs.

4. F-address (feed)
3 digits, therefore T3
5. 3,K-addresses (circle parameter)
2 digits, therefore J2, K2
6. M-address (auxiliary function)
2 digits, therefore M2
7. T-address (tool number)
3 digits, therefore T3
8. D-address (cutter radius)

5 digits, therefore D5

9. S-address (speed)

4 digits, therefore 54

10. L-address (jump)

3 digits, therefore L3

Example of a format description:
Format GOO
N3/G00/X

± 41Z ± -5

11. H-address (with M26)
3 digits, therefore H3

4.89
Types of controls

Types of Controls of CNC-Machine Tools

1. Point-to-Point Control
- The tool can move onyl from point to
point.
- The speed of the tool movement is not
registered.
- The tool path from point to point is
not prescribed. Only the final position has to be correct.
Application:
Drilling machines, spot welding machines
Today rather seldom in use, because most
controls offer straight line or contoura.ng characteristics at the same price,

2. Straight Line Control
The tool moves with
- given speed
axis parallel.
During the. traverse movement milling is
possible.
With milling machines either
- the longitudinal slide or
- the cross slide or
- vertical sl od moves, but never two
sl i des together!
Application:
Today hardly in use anymore; replaced by
contouring control.
ypes OT commis

3. Contouring Control
Various axes traverse simultaneously
with a programmed feed speed on a prescribed path. The movement can be a
straight line or circular movement.
Nearly all CNC-machine tools are today
equipped with a contouring control.

Types of Contouring Controls

a) Two-Axes Contouring Control
(2D control; 2D means two-dimensional)
Application:
Lathes, simple milling machines, erosion
machines, drawing machines, punch presses, etc.)

tr

A C1°1
Types of controls

b) Two and a half Axes contouring Control
Three times 2 axes can be moved simultaneously with programmed feed speed
and this on a prescribed path.
The illustrations are there to show you
what is meant by three times 2 axes.
Application:
Milling machines, machining centers,
flame cutting machines, etc.
I

yldwo

vI %elm', s.r

c) Three-Axes Contouring Control
(3D control)
All three axes can traverse simultaneously on a prescribed path with programmed feed speed.
Application:
Milling machines for the production of
complex three-dimensional workpieces.
If you traverse in three axes simultaneously you need special milling cutters (round head cutters etc.).

Note:
There are misunderstandings caused by
commonly used technical terms.
A milling machine features 3 directions
of movements:
- longitudinal slide movement
- cross slide movement
- vertical movement (up and down)
This is called a 3-axes machine. However, this does not imply that the machine Is equipped with a 3D contouring
control (3-axes contouring control).

4.97
Programming - Geometry
— The center point path of the cutter
- influence of the cutter radius
— Trigonometry of the right triangle
— CNC conformal lettering, calculation
of missing coordinates
— Transitions straight line - circular
arc tangent
— Calculations of auxiliary points
Straight line
Circular arc tangent
Description of the cutter path
We describe the center point path of the
cutter (except G72, G4S-G46)

influence of the cutter radius:
When milling contours the cutter diameter
determines the programming of the cutter
path.

Auxiliary points:
When programming the center points of the
cutter path the target points are called
auxiliary points.

7
When manufacturing axis-parallel contours the cutter radius has to be
added to or subtracted from the contour.

With non-axis parallel contours, auxiliary points have to be calculated. For
this the trigonometric functions of the
right triangle will do.

In quite some cases the coordinates of
crossing points have to be calculated
because they are not indicated in common technical drawings.
Missing coordinates are calculated on
the basis of trigonometric functions.
1 i IVY" 14J1.111,G,II

Survey
Trigonometric functions in the right triangle
Specification:
The right angle (90°) is characterized
with the symbol

L.

Both angles oe, (Alpha) and ( (Beta)
are in sum 90°.

Hypotenuse

cc,

/3 =

a)

3o°

Hypotenuse:
Opposite side of right angle.
Abbreviation: BY
Adjacent side (AS), opposite side (OS):
Each angle ae, and /3 has .a adjacent
side and a opposite side.
Adjacent side = adjacent side to angle
oc., or (1
Opposite side = opposite side to angle
or (3

GK
Sine = —
Hy

Cosine

a = c. sindsin

ck

=

a
--

C

a

c= .
sin

04.

b = c. cosct

AK
Hy

cos 4 –

GK
AK

tan al-,

C

cos c4,

C

Tangent –

a = b. tan
b–

04..•

a

tan 4

-14

Cotangent =

AK
—

GK

cot

b = a. cot
04,

=

a

a–

cot

0C.,

oc.,

4.105
Calculation of Coordinates

CNC-Conformal Lettering
The Calculation of Coordinates
In many cases the lettering of technical
drawings is such that the coordinates for
the CNC-programming have to be calculated.

Non CNC-conformal lettering

CNC-conformal lettering

k

Missing coordinates data can mostly be calculated using simple trigonometric functions.
Calculation of Coordinates

Calculation of Coordinates

Transitions: Axis-parallel straight
line — straight fine at angle
The Y-coordinate of point P 3 is not
known.

tg oc = Y (P P )
2 3)
3
20

'1 (P 2 P 3) = t"tg

•

X(P 2 P 3" e4 30°

300. 20 =

11,54 mm

Exercise:
Calculate the missing coordinate of
point P3.
Make a CNC-, conformal drawing.
Calculation of Coordinates

Transition straight line - tangential arc

Coordinates of points P 2 , P 1 are not
known.

1. Calculate the X-coordinate of S
(crossing point between straight
line and slant plane)

tg tAr =

X
30

X = tg 30?30 = 17.32

2. Calculate the X-coordinate of P2.
••■•w.ii a. val

4.4•••■■

•r • ...a.our I VSSFIVIISAF,

3, Calculate the X- and. Y-coordinate
of point P-4.

SP 1 = 1!..55 mm
sin =

X
11.55

o
X = sin 30 .11.55 = 5.78 mm
cos oc =
-

11.55

= cos 30 11.55 = 10 mm

Letter all points in absolute and incremental mode

PC

Pi,

A111
Calculation of Auxiliary Points

Calculation of auxiliary points
Example 1
You program the path of the milling axis
Q0/Q1/Q2/Q3
Points Q i and Q 2 have to be calculated.

Cutter dia. 10 mm.

1. Calculate the Y-coordinate of point
P9.

tg 30° = YP2
30
YP2 = 304 30° = 17.32 mm
ualcularion or Auxiliary roinis

Example 1 (continued)

2. The path from Q0 to Q i is composed.
•
of
r + 20 mm + k


r+204-6X,

tg

Lk
04,1
=
2
—r

,A X/ = tg-y- •• r =

041

= tg lfi
-

1,34 mm

OK), = 26,34 mm

Coordinates: Q = Workpiece zero-point
Qo
Qo

x

Y

Q2

0

0

26,34

0

60

A 117
Calculation of Auxiliary Points

Example 1 (continued)

3. Calculation of YQ2
Y02 = 17,32 — C„ Y2
tg

4.2

6 Yg =

Y2
= r
4,2
ntg -72-- = 5.tg 30

= 2,87 mm
Y02 =

17.32-2,87
14.45 nun

Dimension the auxiliary points in absolute
and incremental mode. Fix the workplace
zero-point by yourself.
Exercise 1 (Calculation of auxiliary Points)
Calculate the A X and A Y values,

4.121
Calculation of Auxiliary Points

Exercise 1 (continued)

Dimension the auxiliary points in
absolute mode. Workpiece zero-point
as in drawing.
Calculation of Auxiliary Points

Exercise 1 (continued)

Dimension the auxiiiary points
incremental mcde.
Calculation of Auxiliary Points

Exercise 2

- Calculate the coordinate of point
P 3°
- Calculate the missing auxiliary
coordinates.
Cutter radius lo mm
- Pay, attention; angle0C2., is given as

interior angle (enclosed angle).
111

i-ilar••••....

•wr • m

Exercise 3

Program the exercise in absolute or incremental mode
Fix the workpiece zero-point and the
cutter radius yourself.

4.129
Calculation of Auxiliary Points

Example 2
Approach at angle
A big safety distance was selected intentionally!)

= 3o°

S

1

cc, 2 = 6o°
= Safety distance (10 mm)

Cutter radius (5 mm)

r	

Calculation of point (21

1-Xi:
tg4,1 =
xi

Xi

= S
tg,t1

10

tg 30°

17;32 mm

2.A Xi:
tg

4,1
2
= tg

cr.

-- •
2

r = tg 15°.5 =
= 1,34 mm

3. Distance

Ir (PiQl) =

= 15 mm
%Jai Mt WI LP PA, rlo. OP .W.

r-••■• Assns y ■ vs, s air

Example 2 (continued)
Calculation of point 02

S2 = 20 ram
r = 5 mm
'14 2 = 600
1. Y2

tg^z=

Y2 —

Y2

tg4

2

20

—

tg 6°

—'11,55 mm

2.b Y2

tg

I: Y2

2
2

A Y2 =

tg

1. 2
2

r = 2.89 mm

Describe the coordinates from points
Q 1 , Q 2 in connection with P 1 , P2.

4 113
Calculation of Auxiliary Points

Auxiliary Points with acute
Angles

With acute angles you have to traverse
long no-load paths from target point A
to start point B.
That takes time. It may happen that the
slide movements are too short or there
is a collision with a chucking device
or you mill into a. workpiece part.

Two "short cuts" are common in
milling techniques

Traverse with various straight
lines.

Traverse with circular arc.
Traverse in circular arc

sin oc,?

Cos rx 2 —

A X 2 = sin

A2

/

Y?

2

r

/
= (..os oc 2 . r

4 137
Calculation of Auxiliary Points

Traverse in circular arc

Exercise:
Dimensior auxiliary points absolute
an incremental.
Program absolute and incremental.
Select workpiece zerc-point.
Program absolute and incremental.
Select workpiece zero-point.
P i P 2 = 40 mm
oc.2. = 300

Ind
Calculation of Auxiliary Points

Straight line movement
Calculation of Auxiliary Points

Traverse with various straight lines
Exercise:

Dimension absolute and incremental,

- Program the paths.
P 1 P 2 = 40 mm
oc 2

300
Chapter 5

Programming
The contents are arranged according to the
numbering of the G-functions
G90/G91/G92
G651G66

Compare chapter 4
Compare tape operation
RS-232 C operation
Chapter 10
Hints for the
Beginner
— Program start point
Program target point
Tool change point
— Potting the cutter path
The Start Point of the Program
The Tool Change Point
The End Point of the Program
Just imagine the sequence of operation:
the workpiece has to be mounted and
dismounted; tools will have to be
changed.
The start pointof the program should
be chosen so that ail handling can be
done without any obstacle.

The start point of the pkg.gram for the
tool shall always be the end point of
the program.
The tool change point shall be the start
.point of program for reason. of simplicity.'

Determination of Coordinates
Scratch or touch the reference surfaces
slightly and move the tool by hand to
the selected starting point.

Start Point for Chip Removal

Position the tool in a safety distance
to the workpiece. So you can find out
during a program run whether the tool
runs into the workpiece because of a
programming fault (with rapid traverse).
Safety approx. 2 mm
Auxiliary Drawings for Programming
As with the programming of turned pieces
also with the programming of milled pieces the technical drawing is a valuable
help. This is particularly true in the
beginning. It is easier to set up and
check the program.

/
N.P7

N 68

Turned pieces:
'-ts109

You draw and program the path of the
edge tip of the tool bit. The edge tip
is the part of the tool bit which produces the contour.
The tool bit movement is in one plane,
thus it is easier to depict.

Nil

Milted pieces:
Here you have to think and to draw in
three dimensions. This needs quite some
experience.
A three-dimensional depiction is very
distinct but not easy to do, Besides
that, all paths which are not parallel
to axis show shortened.
A separate drawing is a great help for
the first exercises.

An example:

1. Enter into a sketch the program
start point of the cutter.

2. If you firstly move in Z-direction
to the milling plane you can draw
in the workpiece and the cutter
path.

E
2.1. Mark the raw stock contour and
the finished part contour.

5.5
2.2. Draw in the cutter paths. Mark

the various auxiliary points.
Draw in the direction of movement.

2.3. Number the various blocks. The

checking of the program will be
much easier.

3. Blocks with no traverse movements
programmed can be assigned to the
auxiliary points.

4. With absolute programming draw in
zero-point of workpiece.•
GOO - Rapid Traverse
Straight line approach movement

Incremental programming

Absolute programming

AEICILUTE

880

x*8

y

311100

The target point is described from
the starting point of the cutter.

Wie/x4000/V4,4-scie

The target point is described from
the previously fixed zero-point of
the coordinates system.
G00.3

GOO - Rapid Traverse
Ali movements are carried cut with
the highest possible speed, i.e.
rapid traverse (with the Fl-CNC:
600 mm/min).

- GOO is no chip removal movement but a
movement without milling cutter being
in action.

(i)

11111

X

(0)

(K)

Y

(S)

11111 F
(L) (1) (14)

=
MEM
MN
MOM=
ISM..
00

00

000

0

04

00

0

0

0

0r

0

S0

0

-

2 000
0

- No programming of feed (F) because
the slide moves with rapid traverse
when GOO is programmed.

03

I

Programming Exercises
In order to move the milling cutter to
its working position you have various
possibilities,

2

1. Traverse only in 1 axis
The two other axes are zero. - You have
six possibilities. Program all of them,
absolute and incremental,

4

2

3
3

I

2
04
a) Incremental Value Programming:
- The milling cutter is in the position
which is indicated in the drawing.
- It is moved to milling position with
GOO.

b) Absolute Value Programming:
- Milling cutter is moved to milling po-.
sition.
- Program the traverse paths

&GOO. 5
G01:17

2. Traverse In one block simultaneously in 2 axes
Program absolute and incremental. - The
zero•point of the z:::ordinate system for
the absolute proqramming is in point Pc.
Draw in the possibilities.

Question:
How many possibilities are given if
you move all three axes simultaneously?
U-6.711 I

GO1 - Straight Line interpolation
• Straight line cutting movement, feed
programming necessary.

Incremental programming

Absolute programming

X 25 mm
Z 18 mm

X 40 mm Z 5 mm
Y 32 mm

G01/X2500/Y1800/Z = 0/F ...

G01/X4000/Y3200/Z -500/F...

The target point is described from
the starting point of the cutter.

The target point is described from
the previously fixed zero-point of
the coordinates system.

R.rzni
5-G01

GO1 - Linear Interpolation
Linear means straicTht lined_ interpolat_ion
means the finding of intermediate values.
- GOI is a chip removal movement.
- With each chip removal movement you have
t.:7J program a feed.

Format GO1
N3/G01 /X• ± 5/Y ± 4/Z ± 5/F3

With GOl you can traverse parallel to axis
and at each angle in one plane.
5.(401

Examples GO1 (1)
Milling of a Shoulder
- Milling cutter dia. lo

ME

- Mode of programming: incremental.
- A shoulder with a width of 5 mm and
a depth of 4 mm has to be milled.

)

I

Li-)
5

5
(

50 )

-11.

1. Determining the starting point as
indicated.

2, Programming with GOO to the starting

point of chip removal. Choose a
safety distance of 5 mm.
5-G01

Example (1) (continued)
Determination of the Path for the
Milling Cutter
With a diameter- of the milling cutter of
lo mm and a width of the shoulder of
5 mm, the axis of the cutter is exactly
at the edge of the workpiece.

Programming:
Program end position is starting position.
N.

X

N

G
(M)

00
04

•0
Ia

0z

04

6 000

of

o

94
0S
•

i
it

a

(J)

(K)

(0)

2000
0

-S-00o
0
-30o0

,

IS)

Z

F
(I-) (T) fit

0
0
0
s-000

0
-3100
o
o

o

0

Zoo

0

2.00

-Coo*
o

2 to
20o

0
3 op

is M30

Exercise 2 for Example 1
- Program this example in absolute
values.
- Carry out a zero-point offset with
G92.
- Starting position and zero-point of
workpiece as in drawing.
5-G01

GO1 - Example 2
Milling a Groove

- Mode of programming: .incremental
- Dia. cf

milling cutter: lo mm

- Starting position as in drawing
- Depth of groove: 4 mm
- Feed (compare technological data)
- Safety distance before cutting; 3 mm

Pay attention:
When feeding in the cutter, halve the
feed values,
5-G01

Exercise 1 for Example 2

I

Write the program according to the traverse paths as indicated,
4)

(J) X (D)

mori( u (f)

(H)

1.111EME11

111111.111E1

Exercise 2 for Example 2
Program the example absolute with zeropoint offset,

ON

x

(J) (D)

Y
(K)

(S)

F
(L) (T) (H)

IIMIPM

ill=n1.

Exercise 3 for Example 2
Choose other traverse paths for GOO.
N

G
(M)

X
(J) ( 0)
001 — Example 3
Milling a Pocket

- Milling cutter dia. lo mm.
- Starting position as in drawing
- Safety distance before cutting 5 mm

Choose the path of the milling cutter
such that there is always an overlap
of 1-2 mm (in industry approx. 1/10 of
the dia. of the cutter is chosen).
5-G01
Drawing the Path of the Milling Cutter
I

Dimensioning
An important support for your programming
work is an appropriate drawing.
Enter the block number
Mark begin and end of the block
- Use the largest possible scale when
drawing.
Dimension auxiliary measurements
Program this groove as in the drawing in absolute and incremental mode.

Programming sketch and dimensioning of
auxiliary measurements for absolute programming.

N

(M)

X
(J) (D)

(K) (S)

(L) IT) (HI

remarks
5-G01

Drawing the Path of the Milling Cutter
Dimensioning

Programming sketch and dimensioning of
auxiliary measurements for incremental
programming.

( 1-1(T) (H)

remarks
5-G01

Example 4

The milling path in example 3 would
leave the corners in the pocket unfinished.

With pocket milling you cut a rough
pocket first. With a final cut you
mill the complete contour once again
to reach a better surface quality.
Exercise:
- Program and mill the given pocket.
- As final run a continuous smooth cut
of 2 mm shall be taken off. Mode of
programming as you wish.
- Select the zero point of the workpiece yourself.
5-G01

Example 5/G01
Milling a Cross Slot of 45°
Diameter of milling cutter 8 mm.
Program the zero point of the workpiece
using absolute value programming..
Make a drawing and use reference dimensions!

D
0

/ /.

,

N

4111---

(50)

--40.

1. Start position: Milling
5 mm away from theoretical X-edge
5 mm away from theoretical Y--edge
2. Target position.;
As indicated (X 5 mm, Z 5 mm)
5.001

Example 6: Bores 4 x 90°

4

The center point coordinates of the bolt
circle are known.

+ The coordinates of the
bores have to be calculated.
sin d—

= R. lin 45° = 15.0,707 = 10,6
cos
X1

= R. cos 45° = 15.0,707 = 10,6

Since the bores are positioned symmetrically to the center point, you can
calculate the X,Y coordinates of the
other bores (by adding or subtracting).
Dimension the drawing for CNC-manufacture
- in absolute and incremental mode.
Program the example.
5-G01

Example 7:
Bores 6 x 60°

3

15

Bolt circle 6 x 600
- Calculate the coordinates of the bores.
- Dimension the part for CNC programming.
- Program example.

Incremental programming
5-G01

Example 7:
Absolute programming and
lettering

0
Example 8: Hexagon

Use cutter die. 16 mm
1. You calculated the coordinates of
the corner points in one of•the
previous examples.
Transfer the values for points
to 6.
2. You have to calculate the auxiliary
coordinates of the cutter center
path.

val

010
Gal

Example 8:
Hexagon
You have to add respectively substract
the A X and radius values to the co-

ordinate values of points 1,2,3,4,5,6.
Calculation of

tg

L.

X—

tg

„,

Put in measurements for auxiliary points.
program the example!
Pay attention whether there is remaining material at the outer corners. If
yes, mill it off.
54iU2ASU3

The Milling of Circular Arcs

On conventional machine tools circular
arcs can be produced only using special
auxiliary devices. On CNC-machines circular arcs of any angle or radius can
be reached without such special devices.
The key information for circular arcs
is GO2 and G03.
GO2JG03, 3

G02 - Circular Interpolation Clockwise
G03 - Circular Interpolation Counterclockwise
In order to formulate what you mean by clockwise and counterc/ockwise,•we have to determine the direction from which we look at.

Determination
You have always to look at the sense of rotation in one plane from the positive direction
of the third axis.

Interpolation Clockwise G02

XY-Plane:
Cook from +7, direction
to -Z direction.

YZ-Plane:
Look from --)( to -X.
54302/UOU

Interpolation. G02 Clockwise
XZ-Plane:
Look from +'

to

In this technical sketch the direction
the la-plane seems to be inverted.

in

"nette-ines
GO2JG03. 5

Arcs on the PI-CNC Milling Machine
Metric

Inch

Size of radii 0,01. - 99,99 mm
in steps of 0,01 mm

Size of radii 0,001 - 3.999 Inch in
steps of 1/1000 inch

Programming
On the F1-CNC you can program
quarter arcs (90 ° ) or arcs of
circles in steps of 1°.

FA
°--**

G 02

Programming of arcs 90°
on the Fl-CNC
Pz(XYZ)

1. The sense of rotation is described
with 002/G03.
2. The end point of the quarter arc is
determined) by the X,Y,Z addresses
either starting from point PA (incremental) or from the workpiece zeropoint (absolute).
3. The F-address is used to describe the
feed.

1:3z (XYZ)
Format
O
f G2
N31 Go3X±5(±4)/Y ±4(±5)/Z±5/F3

±4 resp. t 5 with X,Y-values for vertical resp. horizontal axis system.
GO2JG03,

Programming of Quarter Arcs in the
XY-Plane
Format G02/G03
1G021 ± 51Y± 41Z =0 /F3
N31G031X

G02 incremental Programming
Example: radius 10 mm
Programmed are X,Y values looked at from the
starting point.

=El=
02

I

02
02
02.

•

Y
-1000
-1000
1000
+1000

1111
0
0
0
0

...

Arc
Arc
Arc
Arc

1
2
3

4

Attention:
In the XY-plane the Z-value has to be
programmed with zero.

cf.:noir:An

7
GO2JG03. 9
G02 - Absolute Programming

Zero-point of workpiece as indicated
in drawing.
You program the XY-coordinates of the
end point of quarter arc, looked at
from the previously fixed point (W).

+X

Note:
Arcs can be moved only in one plane.
Thus, the Z-value of the previous block
has to be taken over.
Block N0I/NO2: Move to start position
Block N7: Infeed in Z -100
Block N8/N9: Arcs 1,2 set deeper

G

X

Y

000

92

0

0

01

00

2000

2000

2

01

2000

2000

3

02

3000

1000

4

02

2000

5

02

1000

1000

0

6

02

2000

2000

0

7

01

2000

2000

-100

8

02

3000

1000

-100

9

02

2000

•

10

0

0

Z

F

1000
1000
.. ,

Position milling cutter at star t. G02

0
0

-100

Position milling cutter at sta: t GO2
LIU-4W. 11

Exercises

G03 - Incremental Programming
- Position of milling cutter at start
as indicated in drawing.
- Circle is in XY-plane
Z=0
- Start the circle programming in point
"0".
N

G

(M)

(J)

X

(0)

F

Z

(K) (S)

(L) (T) (H)

111.181.1

IlplarllIllE

G03 - Absolute Programming
- Position of milling cutter at start
as indicated in drawing.
- Carry out offset of zero point.
- Circle is parallel in XY-plane, but
at a distance Z 4-10 mm.
- Start the circle programming in
point "0".
X

Y

IIII

F

LaimEn
riames
Me

(J) (D)

(K) SS)

(L) (I) (H)

c e•nrslr_ fte)

44
G021G03. 13

Programming Exercise G02/G03
Mode of Programming: incremental
-

Approach direction as in drawing

-

Determine starting point yourself

-

Determine drawing with dimensioning
of triangulation .(station).

ct"

0

I
(50)

ilw

Approach direction as in drawing.
G02/G03, 15

Programming Exercise G02/G03

Alternative 1
Mode of Programming: absolute
-

Zero-point of workpiece as in drawirig,

-

Starting point of milling cutter as
in drawing.

-

Dia of milling cutter lc mm.

Alternative 2
-

Mode of programming: absolute

-

Zero-point of workpiece as in drawing

-

Starting point as in drawing,
G02.101 17

Y-Z Plane

Exercise
Mode of programming: incremental
- Circle in YZ-plane
- Start point as in drawing
.C3
f

X
(J) I D)

tK)

Y

[SI

4-

Exercise
Mode of

programming: absolute

Zero-point as in drawing
- Start point and end point for programming is workpiece zero-point.
N

'

1M)

X
(.•A (0)

(K) {S)

F
(l)(T)(H)1
tilIZRIU4. -1U

Circles X-Z Plane
Exercise
- Mode of programming: incremental
- Starting point as in drawing

i N4)

V

X
(J1 (D)

F
(S)

4

Exercise
- Mode of programming: absolute
- Zero-point as in drawing
- Starting point and end point for
programming is the zero-point.
N

G

M1

X
(J) (0)

(K) (S)

4

e nevlinfl e2 10
0021G03, 21

Some Terms for Circular interpolation G02/03

Complete circle programming
A circle up to 360° can be programmed
in one block.

Quadrants programming
A circle is divided into 4 quadrants.
In one block only one arc of max.
90° can be programmed. The arc of
circle has to be Within a given quadrant.

In this case two blocks are necessary
because the arc reaches over 2 quadrants.

Fl-CNC
Quadrants programming•
- To program a part of an arc within a
quadrant, a code in two blocks is
used.
Arcs with Angles at Random
On the F1-CNC arcs in steps of 10
each can be programmed. The programming
is done in various subsequent blocks.

Mode of programming: incremental
(The following examples are in the XXplane; for all other planes this principle is valid too).
Radius 10 mm

First block
Here the 90° arc in which the
partial arc circle is situated will
be determined.

N100/G02/X1000/Y -1000/Z . . . /F . .
With G02 the computer is given infor•
mation on the sense of rotation.
With X 1000/Y -1000 the computer knows
the quadrant ( I sign of X,Y) and the
radius of the arc.

Next block
. N101/M99/..1 = 0/K =30
M99 is the key information for the
arc
90°.
Blocks N100/101 are considered by
the computer to be one unit. The
computer asks whether there is a
M99 instruction in the block following a 002/G03 instruction.

J-address: for the grades statement.
of the start of the arc •within the
quadrant.
K-address: target address of the arc.

Statement in grades.

g.nn9/ruln

9:1
G 02/G03. 25

Example
Incremental value programming
N100/G02/X1000/Y -1000/Z=0/F..
N:01/M99/J2-=/K67

Example
Incremental value programming
Arc of circle reaching over a few quadrants.
N100/002/X1000/Y1000/Z=0/F...
N101/M99/332/K90
Arc in quadrant I.
N102/G02/X1000/Y -1000/Z=0/F...,
Arc in quadrant II.
N103/G02/X -1000/Y -1000/Z=0/F..,
N104/M99/J=0/1(28
Arc in quadrant III.
Using the Chart
The chart shows you the 3,K-values, the
exact grades and the coordinates of points
for a circle with radius 1.

In order to program the cutter path it
is often necessary to calculate the
coordinates of the arc starting (PA)
and target point (P2). These points
are missing in many drawings.

(All examples are in the X,Y-plane,
the same principle is valid for all
other planes too)

Example:
X(a) and Y(b) coordinates of the target point (PZ) are not known.
Calculation a
a= R•i
1
cos 46.0l =
= R.ccs46.01
a =

10 - 6.945

= C.945.1!
=

3.0567

=

7.194

Calculation: b
sin 46-01
t =

=

These values can also be read from the
chart.

5-G021G 03.27
Circular Interpolation - Parameter
XYZ-Values at the Circle 1
F
,

J,K '

oJ

Grad
0

1
j

a

b

XYZ
0

XYZ

0

-1181 .I
0
1 1
347
0
2 I 1.98!
14
S 1 3.02 1
708
28
4 1 4.06
889. 1
43
5 11 5.10 1
56
1056
6 , 6.05
1222
69
7 ' 7.0/
1403
97
8 1 8.06 '
1569
9.03 1 125
9
1736
10 ! 9.99 i 153
I
1903
11 10.96 ' 181
2069
12 11.93 1 208
2250
13 12.99 1 250
2431
14 1 14.05 ; 292
2597
15 ; 15.03 ,1 333
2764
375
16 I 16.02
2931
17 1 17.02 1 431
18 ' 18.03 1 486
3264
19 19.03 1 542
3431
20 20.04 1 597
!
1
3583
653
31 1 20.97 /
3750
22 .
3917
23 I 23.04 : 792
4069
24 24 . 00 I 861
4222
25 I 24.96 1 931
26 I 25 . 9 2
1000
4375
4542
27 1 26.99 1 1083
4694
28 1 27.98 ' 1167
1250
4.347
29 1 28.98
5000
1333
30 ; 23.98
1
5153
31 1 30.97 ! 1417
5306.
1514
32 ! 32.01
5456
33 1 33.05 1 1611
5597
34 1 34.02 1 1708
5736
35 i 34.99 J' 1806
5875
36 35.96 11903
6014
37 1 36.33 1 2088
6153
38 1 37.95 1 2111
6292
39 1 38.97 / 2222
6431
233S
40 I 39.98
1
1
41 i 41.00 1 2444 ' 6569 '
6694
42 1 41.96 I 2556
6813
43 1 42,97 i 2631
6944
44 1 43.98 1 2886
70819
45 1 45.00 . 29S!
1.03

511111::

S097

22.00

;

722

a

1
;
J.K !
)

XYZ

Grad

,•
T

b

: XYZ

1
-4
46 46.01 I 3056 i 7194 1
47 I 47.02 : 3181 1 7319J
48 1 49.03
3906 ' 7444
7556
49i 48.99 1 3431
50 50.01 1 3569 s 7667 1
7778 I
.
51
7889 I
52 52.04 1 3847
8008
3986
53 53.06
54 54.03 i 4125 1 8087 I
4264 1 8194
55 , 55.00
4403
8292 i
56 55.97
4542
57 56.94
8389
8486 1
58 . 57.98 j 4694
8583
4847
59 , 59.02
8667
5000
60 60.01
8750
5153
61 : 61.01
5306 J 8833
62 1 62.01
8917
5458
63 I 6:3.00
9000
5825
64 I 64.07
5778
9069
65 I 65.03
1
9133
66 I 65.39 I 5931
67 1 66.95 ; 6083 : 9208
6250 I 9278
68 ; 67.99
9347
6417
68 1 68.82
6569 1 9403 1
70 1 69.95
9458 :1
71 1 70.96 r 6736
72 ' 71.96 ! 6903 : 3514 :
7:3 72.97 , 7069
9569
74 73.97
7236 1, 9625
9667
75 74.96
7403
7569 1 9708
76 75.94
77 77,00 , 750 • 9750 .
78 73.06 , 7931 ; 9792 '
9819
79 73.03 i 8097
80 , 80.00 1 8364 ! 9847
9875 1
81 ; 80.96 r 8431
22 1 31.93 : 8397
9903 1
5931 1
83 1 82.98 8778
9944
84 1 83.94 I 8944
9111
9958 !
:35 ' 84.99
.
.
86 1 85.93 ; 9292i 9972 1
87 1 86.97 I 9472 1 9986 1
28 1 38.01 1 9653 10000
89 188.96 i 9813 10000
80 1 90.00 10000 10000
1
,.
1
L
51.02

1

378 8
"J1

In the charts the a,b values are indicated
far the standard circle in 4 digits.

IS
17	

16.02

17,02

13
19

2e

18.08
19.03
20.04

21
22
23
24
25.

20.97
22,00.
23.04
24.00
24.96

26
27

29..32
26.99
27.98
28.98
2q.9R

28
29

le

Example

2764

375
431
486
542
597

2931
3097
3264
3431

653
722
792
961

a-value: 0,0931 mm.
b-value: 0,4222 mm

:749:33
3750
3317
4069
4222

1000

4375
4942
4694
4847
5000

108

1167
1250
1223

30 ,97
32.0
33.05
34.02
34.9 q

14i71514
1611
I708.
1806

5153 !
53:06
5458
5597
5796

35.96
36
3 -7 • 36.93
:3:3,9
33
38.9'
40
39.98

130.2
2000
2111

52-79
6014

31
"::::2	

33
34
35

41
42

41.0
41.96

44
45

4 7:..:.32
45,0c

Radius 1 mm
25 0(24,96)

!

6292 .
6431

2444

6569
6684 i
6816
6944
7:"1:-:-.7=, !

21:::21	

2805
2931

,

a,b values with radius sizes

Example

2222
2:
--25

Values (a, b) for any
desired angle (random)

j

= qt."'
Radius
a = 0,2444 x
= 0,6369 x

mz:
=
=

valuc-•s must b p. pfogram.T;e:d
rcunding c±ff. •

Tb

a -11.

c

z1
G02/G03. 33

The statement of angles is always programmed from the quadrant start.
Thus, the a,b values may have X,Y and
Z characteristics.

Exercise:
Put in the a,b values of quadrants IV
and I.

Radius 10 mm

IV

I

Radius 27 mm
IV
a

j
Exercise:
Put in the coordinates fat PO, PA,
Pz and PE.
Radius AC, mm

Pe

P

Radioc 38 mm

5-G02/G03.35
G02/G03. 37

Programming of Arcs # 90° in absolute Mode

#y

For a better understanding some details
on the Fl-CNC computer:
In the memory (RAM) the 90° arcs (Quadrants) are stored with the block:
N.../G02/x=150o/Y-1000/z....

The computer knows
- sense of rotation (G02)
- position and size of the 90° arc
(statement of coordinates of end point
PE of 90° arc).
The starting coordinate Po of the 90°
arc is known to the computer from the
previous block.

In the computer, this quadrant is
divided into 90 steps of 1° each.

Manufacture of the 90° arc
The computer instruction is:
Traverse all 90 steps of the programmed
quadrant.
La ULF %ALPO. Ov

Programming of Arcs from 0° to

a * 90°

We instruct the computer to edit
only a part of the 90 steps -

This is done with the M99 information

J=0

to

K=30

Flow in the computer
N99/G01/X.0/Y= SOO/Z
NIGO/G02/X=1500/Y=1000/7
N101/M99/J=0/

1. The computer checks whether starting
and end coordinates of the 90° arc
are correct.
It compares the coordinates of blocks
N99 and N100
2. The computer asks whether there is a
M99 instruction in the following
block.

No

All 90 steps are edited

Yes

- It calculates ("theoretically") all steps
up to J.
- It edits traverse Instructions from J to K
- It calculates from K
to 90° without editing
instructions.

g .11

n 9m1 n 1

qa
G021G03, 41

Programming a # 0° to a = 90° in absolute Mode

I. Programming to point PA
NI00/G01/X616/Y468/Z....
2. Arc = 28° to 67°
2.1. Description of the 90° arc:
N101/G02/X1616/Y1468/Z....
The absolute coordinates of the quadrant
end point PE are described starting
from point PA.
By computation this is the end point of
the quarter arc.
XE = XA /R/
YE = YA t /R/
ZE = ZA
2.2. N102/M99/J28/K67

Flow of data in the computer Manufacture
1. The computer checks whether coor-

dinates of starting point PA and
quadrant end point PE are correct
(absolute).
2. M99 instruction exists.
a) Computer proceeds up to J28
(= 280 ) - without traverse instruction,
b) It gives traverse instructions
from J28 to K67 (28°-67°). The
impulses from J28 to K67 are
worked through. The indicated
quadrant is manufactured from starting point PA to target point PZ.
Pemrograman cnc tu 3 a
GOVG03. 43

A Method of programming Arcs a

90° (absolute)

With partial arcs GC # 90° it is often necessary to calculate starting and target
point of the previous and the following
blocks: thus it is useful to establish a
chart.

Specification:
PA - Starting point of partial arc of
circle
PZ - Target point of partial arc of
circle
PE - End point of quadrant ("theoreti-'
cal" target point)
PO - Starting point of quarter arc.

Examples:
%A %Orme •...1,61.‘lw

Coordinates

PA: PA is the target point of the lolock
before the circle .programming
XA
YA
ZA

4 1)

PE: "Theoretical" end point of the
quarter arc
XE = XA + R
YE = YA + R
ZE = ZA (interpolation in the pane)

+X

PZ: Programmed target point
XZ = XA

+

P

X

YZ = YA

+ L1

Y

ZZ = ZA (interpolation in the plane)

+X

Coordinates path of the_partial radius
X = XPZ - XPA
Y = YPZ - YPA

A Z = 0 (interpolation in the plane)

P0: Theoretical starting point of the
quarter arc
X0 = XA - a
YO = YA b
ZO = ZA
5-G 021G03. 45
G021G03. 47

Exercise:
Put in X,Y-values, Z-value = 0
Y

X

PA

PE

Pz

+X

Po

L

Program the path
W-PA.,Pz-P1

Z
G02/G03. 49

Exercise:
Put in X,Y-vaiues f Z-value = 0
Program path
W -PA - Pz -P1

PA

z

X

PE

• Pz

Po
L

N

M}

WI ) 1")

	

(K) (S)

	

(L)

0.) (H) remarks

11

ea

• •••

aft A."

•
G02/001. 51

,

ism

Exercise:
Slot 3 mm deep

34'

Programming: in . absclute mode
Zero point of workpiece as in drawing.

air
XV

-a—

.4

4
27

im.

.50

st.
.Lit,14

G04 - Dwell

If you manufacture a borehole and withdraw the drill after you have reached
the desired depth, then the chip will
be torn off. The base of the borehole
has steps.
With boreholes of tapered shape this
often does not matter. With shouldered
boreholes, however, it can be disturbing.
The same applies for milling cutters of
larger diameter or for fly wheel cutter
if you move away suddenly.
You have an unwanted shoulder in the
workpiece.
;In such cases a dwell should be programmed.

Programming

The tool remains 0,5 seconds in
the programmed position of the previous block.

r "%AA 4
5•G21

G21 - Empty Line
You may program as many empty lines as
you wish in a program.
The empty lines are jumped over in the
program sequence.
In the place of empty lines you can
program at later stage other G- or auxiliary functions.
Subroutines
G25/M1 7
The subroutines are "managed" by the
main program.
In the main program the movements are
programmed up to the starting point
for the subroutines.

MAIN PROGRAM

At the end cf. a sabr--_:uLlri
structisn is given to
the main progr.,im.

tz..e in-

5-G25. 1
5-G25

Subroutines
It happens quite often that varlous
operations cf same shape :ire manufact,ired
at one and tne same workpiece.

Example
- 4 geometrically identical nocker.s.
- For the manufacture of each :'.00ket
the milling . cutter has to no move.-a
to working position.
- The programming and man1Lfactar1ng
process is the same for each individual pocket. You program in one
program pocket milling for 4 times.
These identical operations may be programmed just once and then "stored".
If they are needed they are called up

To our example
1. The tool is moved to the first miiihg start point.

----Start and endpoint of
subroutine

2. The subroutine is caned up. The
first pocket is being milled.
3. The tool is then moved to the second
milling start point.
4. Subroutine is caned up.

/

S. The tool is then moved te the thira
milling start point.
G. Subroutine is called
Subroutine

etc.
Principle: Call-up of Subroutine and
Sequence on Fl -CNC

MAIN PROGRAM

UP

UP:
6-G25

Subroutine-Programming
G25 Jump to Subroutine
Ml 7 Jump back to Main Program

1. Programming up to the first start of
the subroutine (assume NO5).

2. Call up subroutine G25 in block NO6t
N06/G25/1,100
- With G25 the subroutine is called
up,

NOO/G90

r---- NO6/G25/1,100
N07/GOO

N/M30

- Under. the F-address we describe the
block number with which the subroutipe begins.
In ' this case the subroutine begins
with block no. N100 (the block no.
is selected by the programmer).

3_ The subroutine:
N 100/
N101...
N102
N703...
N104 ,..
N105/G01
In the subroutine the operation to be
repeated is described (block N100 to
block NIOS)

1-4,--N100/G91

N105/G00
N106/M17

4. Jump back instruction M17!
At the end of a subroutine you have
the jump back instruction M17, The
program jumps to the following block
with which the subroutine was called
up.
Example

- Programming main program: absolute
- Programming subroutine: incremental
- Zero point of workpiece as in drawing
- Reference point set-off as in drawing
- Diameter of milling cutter 8 mm
Continue the program. Start point shall
be end point of program.
In block N05 the workpiece zero-point
is programmed again.

t4

G
IM)

X
(J)

(D)

00 92

MI
8

iY46
C
00
Is
92
30
25

900
900
34 o0

Y
(K)

(5)

a
5 2000
900
.900

900
900

F
I)-tir)(H)

3M0
r Of
0
3 ow
200
LSD
200
2.o0
t-5-0

50 9►

51 Of
2

0

0
0

53 Of

5-4 oi

700
0
-700

700

6$" Of

b

- 701

56 00

57 Hel

0

0

0

- 6 D0 TO
140
0
0
T 40
'44 0
0
-(40
.600
5-Ci25

More Subroutines
You can write as many subroutines In a
program as you like.

Example
The slots 1 + 2 are subroutine no. 1.
The slots 3 + 4 are subroutine no. 2
The program shows an incremental main
program.

N000

Subroutine -N005
instructions
N006 / G25. / LSO
N007

Jumps back

/GOO

N008 / G25 / L60
N009
NO10
NO11

/GOO
/

+111

G25 / L50
/GOO

NO12 / G25 / L60
C

0

0

N013

/GOO 'Of

N014

(/)

U

0
0

N... / M30
as
0

cn

--la

N050 / G
-4.-N051
-b-N052
Subroutine 1
-11-N053
-41-N054
-41-N055
-IwN056
M17 Jump back
instruction

4J

0

—N060
-0.14061
-1.-N062
-41.N063
-4-N064
-s-N065
-0-N066

Subroutine 2
M17 Jump back
instruction

0

9
(Hi (i)(i)

(S) (N)
A

N

(0g)

. . imilimbiI
a
r
CL

9

OE
1111111PriN
„v.

-

CO
9

buTTT7w io laaampTia -

.apow TrquamaxouT ul sauTqnoaqns

5TMJP

aoaTd)lom lo quTod o,zaz -

UT

.6uTm p zp

--qns7

t

UT

s p -luTod

.sauTqnoa
oa-rcINJom agq areJEload

aidwex3

c7n-c

8

111
5425

Part of a subroutine

You can also call up parts of subroutines.

An example:
- Slot 11) and slot (2) are icirti1
and contained in cross slot 3 and 4.
- You write a subroutine for slot
and 4.
N100/G91
N101/G01 to

N108
N109/M17
You can use block N105 to 106 for the
manufacture of slot 1 and 2.

It is possible to call up parts of a
subroutine.
In this example:
Block N105 to N109 / M17
6-G25

Part of a subroutine program
The scheme shows an incremental main program. In an absolute Main program you have
to determine the workpi.ece zero-point with
G92.
NCC

NO5 Milling cutter is positioned for subroutine
NOC.-

025

L100

N07 / GOO -4
4_1!

01
,--1 !

m'

Noe / G23 / L100
....s

c
--4

NO9 / G00
N10 / G:.
N11 / GOO.
G:5

.

it—

"W

i

L105
-NO

L10

•
•

—LØP r moo
N101
N102
=.=4

N103
N104
111111'

N105

S

N106
• N10:
N108
N109

M17
5.G25

Example G25/M17
•

Program this example:
Width of slot E. mm
Depth of slot 3 mm
Zero point of workpiece as in drawing
Decide yourself between absolute or
Lncremental value crogramming.
Scart point as in drawing.

lo

29
50

rye

x

WI

(DI

(X)

Y

(S)

MIMI
•1111•IN
111111111111M
IIIIIIIIIIIIININNIIII
r
11111MENIIIIIIIIIM
MINN
111111•111
IIIIIIIIIININIMIIIIIIIMI
III
MIMIIIIIII •

III
alErano

ammm=11W1111111111111
IIIIIIIMIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIM
Example:
You have to mill a rectangular slot.
Since the slot is deep you need a few
runs; these are identical in the XYplane.

Example:
- Miii cutter is al;eady cutting at block
-no. N005.
- NO06 is jump

subroutine.

- The subroutine consists of blook.Nloi
to N105.
- N105 )s -jump back to main program.
- NO07 is inreed in main program.
- N008 is jumc to subroutine.
etc.
5425
Exercise
Program the workpiece. The depth cf cut
be reached in 3 runs.

Jo
I
1

0.4

"cr

42
50

F
M (1-1) remarks
D-taZO

Exercise
- Make a sketch indicating the start
point.
- Determine. the zero point. Jii)
- Main program: absolute
- CirQuLar slot in 2 runs

Depth of slot 10 mm

(M)

25
(50)

(J)

x

(D)

(L) (1)

111
1111111111111
EMI
5-G25

The Nesting of Subroutines
CaIt-up – Sequence

MAIN PROGRAM

Nil

UI

Us
5-027

G27 - Jump Instruction
Format N31G27/L3

milliLW
IIMIIIIIE's
- ......
.....
G
IM)

N

X

(J) (D)

z

V

(K) IS)

F

(L) ( r) (H)

,,

..•,...= --dm

011
,20 omare,
......

.

With this in.str...icieri
backward
are

:

LiL

- :2-1-:, er the
rogramme'
the -,Drc.gram

.13,3 :ess
tc the
cc

E
'cicck
where

Example

1

3 :::ck IT
instrac.t;,cn to jump

Block 120
Instru:tin to _lump pack

NI

Application
N G
(M)

(J)

X

(0)

y

(K) (S)

11/

F
IL) MK

- You describe a finishing
to N12).

IEEE
L

f 5111111111•111111111

I
1

Ell

e

(M)

X
(J) (D)

Y
(K) (S)

Z

IE
MINN
11•11111
1111311131
4 11111111111111•11111111

rill

finishing program

p rogram

(N4

- In the block proceeding the f nisning
operation you program 021.

finishing program

um=
Eria.....
N

- The surface of the work p iece shall be
worked or not,

- In blocks N4 to N12 the finishing c71r.
is carried out.

F
(L) (T)(H)

Jump instruction
/3

111
WPM
MINIM
mita i io 1111.11
llEjl
IMIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII
NMI

If the surface should remain unfinished:
Delete N3/G21
Program N3/G27/L13
The blocks N4 to N12 are skipped.
5-G40/G48

The Cutter Radius Compensation Parallel to Axis
G40 - Cancel the compensation
G45 - Add cutter radius
G46 - Deduct cutter radius
G47 - Add cutter radius twice
G48 - Deduct cutter radius twice

G45/G46/G47/G48 are self-maintaining
functions. They are revoked by G40
or M30 (program end). G45 can be overwritten by G46/G47/G46 and vice-versa.
Before programming G45/G46/G47/G4d
y ou have tc describe the too: data
under M06.

In examples up to now we have always
been programming the center line path
of the cutter. With the lengths to be
worked the cutter radii had to be
added or deducted.
This calculation work can be taken over
by the computer, if appropriate informations are given.

I +

2D
a4.2 14V1 41 4+0

G45 - Adding Milling Cutter Radius

Programming incremental
cutter shal touch the in
The
side of the contour.
Conventional programming:
N.../G00/X=1±rf
The radius has tID cc added to the length

I.

Programming with G45 (Adding Cutter Radius)

1113

IN

(J)

X

Y
(Di

D 500

(K)

F
(L.)11) (H)

(S)

S2. D O('

1. The computer has to .r.ow the cutter
radius so that it can. calculate the
correct movement (1
r).

0

ril

In one of the previous blocks the
tool data have to be describe, otherwise alarm sign A18.

2. Call up G45:Add cutter radius once.

.

•

„
o
OMilim
o.s Soo
III

3. Program movement.
Measure L (30)
The computer picks up the tool data from
the M06 instruction which was programmed
last.

•

3000

Cancel the cutter radius compensation
•N.../G40

n_r/Aftlf4Aft
5-G40/G48

G46 - Deducting the Cutter Radius

Mode of programming: incremental
Cutter shall touch outer contour.
Cutter dia. lo mm

Programming:
N100/M00/W3C0 S2000/Y=0 / .F1
N101/G46
N102/GOI/X=L/Y=0/Z.=0/F.

L

The cutter moves by the distance 1-1).

Approaching an Edge - Not parallel to Axis

ti

Programming: incremental
Cutter dia. 16 mm
Reference dimension H Z ---- 0
11e1/M06/D800./S1700/Y=0/T(F)1
NO2/G46
NO3/GOI/X4000/Y2000/Z=0/F...
14°44/M30

40

Approaching an Edge - Not parallel to Axis
Pro gramming: absolute
- Cutter dia. 16 mm
Zero-point as in jrawing

40

NOO/G92/X-4000/Y-3500/21000/
NO1/M06/DE00/52000/2=0/T01
NO2/046
NO3/G00/X=0/Y=0/21000
NO4/M30
5-G401048

Exercises G45/G46
- Program the distance/ traverse P 1 -P
absolar_c! and Irlementai. mc•de.
- Radius

D:

12 mm

- Zero-point frca FoLnt P.

N

G

F
(Lic—n(t

(M)

+y

N

G
thA)

Y

X
(J)

(D)

)S}

(K)	

Z

F
()..i sT,,:!—I;

.	

N

G
( M)

(J)	

N

G
!M)

(J1

Y

X

(5)

(D)

(K)

(Di

. v
K) (S)

X

—

Z

F
tl..} (T. (1.4)

Z

F
Li iTT)(i-!)
5-G40/G48

G47 - Add Cutter Radius Twice
- Outside contour shall be milled
- Mcde of programming: incremental
- Cutter radius 6 mm
- Starting point as in drawing

Programming:
NO00/M06/D600/S2000/2=0/TtF:i
N1/G46
N2/G01/X2000/Y1500/Z=0 F..,
N3/G47
N4/G01/X4000/Y=0/Z=0/F...
N5/G01/X=0/Y3000/Z=0/F...
N6/GO1/X -4000/Y=0/Z=0/F.,
N7/G01/X=0/Y -3000/Z=0/F...
N8/G46
40
15
20

N9/G00/X -2000/Y -1500/Z=0/
N10/M30

•
1..j

Block N4 to N7

Cutter radius is added twice.
Block NO2, N9

Cutter radius is deducted once.

Cutter path plotted
Urt1414AULF0

Programming exercise:
Cutter radius 5 mm

Incremental programming
Starting from point P1

Absolute programming
Determining the zero-point starting
from point Pi.
(L)(11iH)

c_rlAnirtmg
5-0401G48

G48 - Deduct Cutter Radius Twice
Example: Milling an inside contour
- Milling cutter radius 6 mm
- Mode of programming: incremental

Program:
N000/M06/D600/52000/Y=0/T(F)1
N1/045
N2/000/X2000/Y1500/Z=0
N3/001/X=0/Y=0/Z -500/F...
N4/G48
N5/001/X4000/Y=0/Z=0/F...
N6/001/X=0/Y3000/Z=0/F...
N7/GO1/X -4000/Y=0/2=0/F...
N8/001/X=0/Y -3000/Z=0/F...
Block N3: move in.

N9/001/X=0/Y=0/Z500/F...

Block N5 - N8: inside contour

N10/045

Block N9: move out of inside contour

N11/000/X -2000/Y -1500/Z=0/F.

Block Nil: withdrawal to starting
position

N12/M30

Cutter path plotted in one plane
5-G40/048

Exercise:
Cutter radius 5 mm

Incremental prcgrannin9
Starting from point Pi

Absolute programming
Determining the zero-point
from point PI.
5-G40/G48

Example: Combined Inside-/Outside Contour

Mode of programming: incremental
Milling cutter radius 5 mm

25

50

35
b-U4U/U411

Exercise:
Program the example in
absolute mode,

- Zero point as in drawing.
Cutter radius 5 mm

F
(L)(1) (H)

remarks

e Aftle■ AO

in
•G64

G64 - Switching Feed Motors Currentiess

The previously programmed G- and M-codes
remain stored.

Switching currentless with program
stored
G64 is a pure switching function. it
is not stored.

°o°°
N G XYZ F
D,J K

t+ i

718 9
4 5 6
1 2 3

1. Press key

64

M

2. When a number appears on the VDU,
press keyLpE1.1

1NP

HICl

DEL

M

REV
FWD

until G-lamp flashes.

I

3. Key in

64

4. Press key [INPL the feed motors are
now currentless.
5.1512

G72 - Pocket Milling Cycle
Pockets are a quite common shape when
milling. The programming work of many
single blocks can be put together to a
cycle. The computer offers a fixed sequence r cycle.

Programming G72
1. G72
2. X-value, inside dimension of the
pocket in X-direction.
3. Y-value, inside dimension of the
pocket in Y-direction.
4. Z-value = depth of pocket
. F-value

N.,

Format G72
N3/G72/ x

.mom= c
Ill
N

G

01.1”	

X

W) (D)

0)

Y

($)

Z

F
(L) (T) (HI

mo..0..

+ 4/Z ± 5/F3

With this block the machine cannot mill
a pocket yet.
- It does not know the radius of the
cutter and thus cannot, calculate the
movements.
- Therefore, the tool has tc be described in one of the previous blocks
(MO6).
The computer uses these data (cutter
radius) to calculate the effective
movements which were programmed last.
-I f no M06 was programmed before, alarm
sign lb will appear.
L

MP 4
5-G72

Pocket Milling Sequence

The milling cutter has to be positionea
before the pocket milling can start,
NJ

I. The cutter moves into the pocket by
the Z-value, If a Z-movement is programmed

2. Milling out reaming) a pocket:
- The first movement is in X-directich.
-X +Y

- The signs determine the sequence
of the traverse.

Overlap:

•

The overlap is 1/10 of the cutter radius (with 3 mm radius approx.
0,5 mm).
The computer taxes the information about.
the radius from the MOE block which was
programmed last.
Ot

tae

Finishing ram:
The sides are. being finished.. Traverse
10/11/1.3. Finisning measu2:e approx.
1/1C of the. .:Litter radius.

Rapid traverse

Begin of cycle

4. Cutter moves out of pocket (Z-direction) into starting position.
The pocket milling cycle is complete.

End of cycle
t

Pockets can be prodrammea in absolute
or incremental mode.
Incremental programming:

X,Y,Z values are given from the stlarting
position.

Technological tip
When moving in a milling cutter the feed should be approx. halve of the normal
cutting feed.
Therefore it is advisable to program this first movement in an extra block.

RJ179 R
5472

Summary G72 (M06)
With Pocket in XY-plane
N.../M06/D(X)
:
Data for calculation
of cutter path

.../G72/x.

CD

D

X-value

/Z C_

/Y

/T(F)(::)

/F

Y-value

X = Inside measurement of pocket

1406
D(X)

/Z(II )

/S(Y)

= Inside measurement of pocket

= Cutter radius

SCY) = Speed
Z

= Hz-value

er'F)

Z = Indeed depth

= Tool number

F = Feed

The computer will calculate all reference points automatically.

Example:
.,- Cutter ciameter 10 mm
Ihe pocket is programmed. incrementaL'Ly
Start. position for cvc:a as in
drawing.
X
NI (D)

G
iNt)

N

r

'f

Z

IS)

2000

Mob

_Lil

(K)

too

o
-so.

N:7) = Move to. start position
NE = Tool data

= Pocket milling cycle

F
Mg) OA)
30

25

Example:

20

o
o

N

0

Cutter diameter 8 mm
Programming mode: incremental

Example:
Programming mode: absolute

o

Determine the zero point of the
workpiece

o

60

o

Mill the pockets in two runs with twi,
subroutines, if you know G27 already.
G81/81

Boring.
With. GOO and GO1 you can execute boring
operations:
1. You program with 001 (feed at desired
depth of bore
2. With rapid traverse you move to the
starting point of the boring operation.
The procedure is always the same one:
-

Boring with feed (G01) to length L
Withdrawal by length L with GOO.

Therefore these two movements are put together in one G-function (cycle),

G81 - Boring Cycle
Programming:
N.../G81/Z t /F...
- Under the Z-address you program the
depth of bore.
F-address: feed in mm/min
The withdrawal is done automatically
with GOO.

GOO,
G81

Application:

Through holes with a riot too large depth
of bore.
.20Z/

G82 - Boring Cycle with Dwell
If the depth of bore is reached, the withdrawal with G81 starts immediatel y (rapid•
traverse). The bore chip is torn off. The surface at the base of the hole is nct
clean.
Therefore the drill bit remains in the
programmed position Z.

G04

GO1

GOO

G82
Sequence
1. First movement: with feed
2. If depth of bore is reached, the drill
bit turns without feed 0,5 seconds.
Withdrawal in rapid traverse.
Programming:
N.../G82/Z±

/F

Application:
Blind holes cf medium depth.

g _itiVI 4
G83/B3

G83 - Withdrawal Cycle
it happens quite often with deep
bores that the chips are not flowing
out properly.
- Therefore you have to withdraw the
drill bi.t in order to take away the
chips.
You can program the operation with
G01/GOO/G01/G00 etc. or with various
G81 or G82 cycles.

The drawing illustrates the principle,
that a few cycles are again put together
to a new cycle.

1. Step

Chip discharge

2. Step

Chip discharge -

3. Step
Chip discharge
etc.

G 00

G 01

Gal

G83
083/B4

Programming G83:

The final depth of bore and the feed are
to be programmed.

Procedure:
1. Bore at 6 mm depth with feed
2. Withdrawal with rapid traverse (6 ram)
3. With rapid. traverse 5,5 mm and

6 mm feed

4. Go to starting point with rapid traverse
5. With rapid traverse 11 mm, with feed 6 mm
etc. until you reach the programmed 2.value.

Application: Deeper bores
G811821831B5

Example:

Pay attention to the technological data.
Use drilling emulsion to protect the drill
bit.
Bores larger than 10 mm dia, need to be
rough-drilled.
Use 081, 082, G83.
G85

G85 - Reaming Cycle
In order to achieve bores with a high surface
quality, reaming of bores is necessary.
Using standard twist drill you may reach
quality 11 to 12. For higher quality standards
the bores have to be reamed. By reaming you
reach quality 6.

G85 is a combination of two G01
'commands.

Programming:
- Block number
- G85
- Z-value
- Feed F

Feed Gal

Feed GO1
G8S

Note:
• The depth of the bores to be reamed is
indicated. in the technical drawing.
The bore-length 25 has a tolerance
measurement,
G89

G 89 - Reaming Cycle with Dwell
The sequence is the same as with G85. The
reamer bit remains 0,5 seconds in
the dead position if the programmed depth
. is reached.

Sequence

GO1

G04

001

G85

Infeed with feed at
length Z

0,5 seconds dwell

Withdrawal with feed
at length Z
Chapter 6
Tools, tool lengths compensation,
radius compensation of milling cutter

Programming of tools
Tool lengths compensation (principle)
Working with various tools
1. Determining the tool sequence
2. Determination of tool data
2.1. Diameter, technological data
2.2. Detecting the tool length differences
3. Calculation of tool lengths
4. Tool lengths compensation in the
program sequence
5. Tool lengths corrections
Other cases for programming M06
Connection: Zero-point offset G92
Tool lengths compensation M06
Milling of chamfers
Depth of bore with spiral drill
Tool data sheets
Tool sheets

6.1
6.3
6.5
6.7
6.7.
6.9
6.13
6.15
6.17-6.21
6.23
6.25
6.27-6.33
6.35
The Programming
of the Tools

Tool magazines of industrial NC-machines
are equipped with up to 50 or more tools.

The sequence is programmed.
Technological data and dimensions have to
be programmed for each individual tool bit.
Tools are programmed using the T-addxess.
T stands for tool.
Tool Lengths Compensation

TO1
i`'

T03

T02

y
ma
IC

)411111111 .

I

gar

Alaix
AVIV

_______
..Ta=

•

•■■•.

..„,.--,L,.....

'''r • •...
---.a.:. -;—
.
um Gila

I

......

7-TITTIT.

E
...,

074

111111

: _a
or EA

It

...,4=a0

PC

z;

1 Target

1

4

I Actual

,

rl
4.

i

I Actual 1

Z,

Act. Position = Targ. Pos.

Targ. Info = + HZ

Targ. Info = —HZ

TO1

IM06ID

. /S. . . . /Hz = on-o1 I

The computer is given information on the
target position or desired position.

102

IM06/D

/S. . . /Hz = +

. 11021

T03

[M06/D .... .... /Hz = — .

/T03 I

Imagine the coordinate system transferred into the reference plane of the
tool.
The target position is described starting from the actual position.
M0611

Working with various Tools
Determining the toot sequence
Detecting the tool data
Compensation of tool lengths
T1

'or the manufacture of a workpiece you
often need different tools: drills, various milling cutters etc.
The programmer needs to know various
data such as
- Kinds of tools
- application of different tools,
-. position of tools to each other

T3

1. The milling cutters are of different
diameters. These are known'to you.
2. The tools are of different lengths.
These are not known to you. You
have to measure the lengths and
take them into consideration when
programming. Otherwise you move the
cutter in the air without chip removal or you run it into a workpiece
(crash).
M06/2 U

Procedure
1. Determining the tool sequence

Milling a slot with T2

Facing with T1

Milling a T--slot with T3

2. Determination of tool data
2.1. Diameter, technological data

Entering the data
1. Stick the tools into the correSponding column.

r

'D=

.

:d

7

2. Enter the technological data:
d =, Cutter diameter
D = Cutter radius
F = Speed of feed
t = Maximum depth of cut
S = Speed

2

easier.
M06/3

2.2. Detecting the Tool Length Differences (Hz)

The differences in tool lengths nave tc
be measured. The measurements can be
taken using an external presetting device. In. many cases the measuring system
within the CNC-machine is taken use of.
You can scratch with all tools a reference surface or measure the data using
a dial gauge.
The difference is called Hz.

Procedure
Mount Tl reference tool) and scratch
reference surface, set dial gauge respectively.
Detection of data by
scratching

Detection of data with dial
gauge.

Scratching only when cutter is turning

Set dial gauge when machine is
at stand-still.

Set dial gauge to 0.

T1

T3

T2

T4

Press keyFaI4, the Z-value display is
set to 0.
‘=17.1

N G XYZ F

00C13000

:

d.

D,J

F

0

t

s

t
HZ 0•.1R

L,T M

T
M06/4 U

Mount 12

Scratch surface

Touch dial gauge with cutter
until it shows 0.

Read value from display.

N G XYZ F

0003000
D,JK LT M

650
d

!

Enter value into tool data sheet. In this
way you determine all tool lengths.

F
t

s
HZ 0

Pay attention to the signs!
6 sc

•

+
3. Calculation of Tool Lengths
(Tool lengths compensation)
Since these data are known you could
take the various lengths into consideration. This would, however, be
quite confusing calculation work and
will often lead to mistakes.

Calculation of tool length M06
(Tool lengths compensation)
(Programming)

Format M6
N3/M06/D(X)5/S4/Z(Hz)±5/T(F)3

The data are entered into the
pro g ramming sheet.

N

G
(M)

X
(J)

Y
(D)

(K)

(9)

Z

F
IL) (T) (H)

T = tool number
D = milling cutter radius
S = spindle speed only for your information)
Hz = difference in tool length

faIMMKIINIIIIIIM
111111ENIMIIIIIIIMIMM

•inmmommirm
EMI= 131111
121111MMIE
g ' MEM MIIIIII
111111111111M1111•11
2 coo

65 0

■,. ME-ME ii•11111111111

Note:
If you writ a number 1,2,3,4 under the

F(T) address when programming M06, this
automatically means program hold.
If there is a 0 under the F(T) address,
there will be no hold.
Tool Lengths Compensation in the
Program Sequence

The first tool (T01) has a H z value
= O.
N.../M06/D2000/S1300/7,Hz)

0/T01

Manufactu;€1

Tool change T02.
N.../M06/D500/S2000/Z(Hz) = 800/T02
[ tart
First the tool T02 moves from the actual position to the target position.
Then the manufacture itself starts.
Tool Lengths Corrections

You have finished the manufacture of a
workpiece and find out that the Zmeasurement is not correct.
- The grogram is correct
- The starting position of the cutter
is correct.

What is the reason?
The target value information {H z value)
was not correct (wrong, inaccurate
measurements, cutter not resharpened).
Actual value
Target value

TARGET INFORMATION Hz wrong
M06/D.../2.../2+ 12.43/T02

Reference line

Z=1,43

zK

=11

The target information Hz has to be
corrected.
Hzk = Corrected target information

Hzk = Hz +

correction value

M06/1),../S.../Z+ 1100/T02

4{.11

Z)
Example of a Correction of the Hz•value

You may
1. Measure tool once again
2. Detect the correction value by
measuring the workpiece.
AZ = -1,35

The Hz information has to be correcvalue.
ted by the

- Imagine the coordinate system transferred to the Z-actual position of
the workpiece.
- Add the correction value 6, Z to
the target information Hz of the
tool bit.
AZ = 1,35

Pay
Hz

2: 15,4 -1,35 =14,05

attention: L Z may have t sign.

Hzk =
=
=
=

Hz + (-G Z)
15.4 + (- AZ)
15.4 - 1.35
14,05

The value Hzk = 14,05 is corrected in
the programming sheet, tool. data
sheet and in the memory.
Example
Programmed Hz-value (actual informaticn):
- 6,25 mm
Workpiece measurements: Actual and target, compare drawing.
Correct the Hz-value
Hzk = Hz

1- ( t

2)

Pay attention to the sign of

Z. 

Z.

Hzk =

Example
Hz of TO1 = 0
Hz of T02 = -4,32
Workpiece:

Actual value TO1 = 10,5 mm
Actual value T02 = 5,2 mm
Target value TO1 = 10 mm
Target value T02 = 6 mm
Correct the Hz-values of TO1 and T02.

TO1
Hzk

j

TO2
Other Cases for Programming M06

i
T.n i
io
NI

G

X

OAF- ill
(M)

(J)

(D)

(K)

Y

(8)

Z

0
H.
iii
(T )
F

(I-)

(H)

If a G45, G46, G47, G48 or a G72 com
mand (cutter radius compensation) is
programmed, in one of the previous
blocks a M06 has to be put in, otherwise the alarm sign will, appear.
Ali: Cutter radius information missing
The computer needs the cutter radius
information D in order to calculate
the compensated paths .(G45,G46,G47,G4'•
The same applies with the pocket
ing cycle G72.

Alarm A16
Cutter radius
information missing.
Connection:
G92 Zero-point offset
M06 Tool lengths compensation

M06

G92

The Hz-information is an incremental
target information within an independent coordinate system.

The origin of the coordinate system
is determined with G92.
Milling of Chamfers
Chamfers are usually milled at an angle
of 45°.

The size of the chamfer is determined
by the programmed. path and/or by the
cutting contour.
1. Chamfer size determined by different
cutter paths (different distances
between cutter axis and workpiece
edge)

2. Chamfer size determined by different
infeed and Z-direction. The cutter
path remains unchanged.
Programming a Chamfer
with Cutter Path unchanged

The contour is milled with a cutter of
(;) mm dia.
To avoid the necessity to program a
new cutter path for chamferring, the
angle cutter shall be programmed in
direction such that a chamfer lx1 mm
is reached.

Cutter path. - end mill
- Cutter path - angle cutter

How deep has the Angie Cutter
to be fed in?
The radius of the angle cutter which
mills the inside contour of the chamfer:

[- adius end mill/
R

r

Width of chamfer!

With a mill. path using a 5 mm shank,
dia. '3 mm, the radiJs 3f the angl e
ter produces the chamfer ix45°.

Angle
cutter

Mill
path

Width of
chamfer
Angle cutter, dia. 16 x 4 mm

With a 45 0 angle cutter, the cutting radius changes by one mm if the cutter is
fed in by 1 mm.

Example
Radius of mill path 5 mm

1. Cutter at height 0
Distance to workpiece = 1 mm

2.. Cutter fed in by 1 mm
Radius 5 mm touches edge.

3. Cutter fed in by z mm
Chamfer. 1x45° is produced.
Measure of total depth!
Measure until radius mi l path

Width of chamfer (1 mm)

2

mm

mm)
Example
Unchanged mill path
- Radius end mill: 5,63 mm
- Chamfer 0,67 x 0,67 mm

With an infeed of 1,63 mm the angle

cutter touches the contour.

1+ 0,63=
1,63

Infeed 1 mm
Infeed 1,63 mm

R5
R5,63

Radius- 6,3 mm produces the chamfer contour.
5,63 mm radius cutter path
0,67 mm width of chamfer
6,30 mm

,3

Cutter infeed

1,63+0,67=
2,3
5,63
0,67 mm

1,63 mm (radius touches contour)
0,67 mm

(width of chamfer)

2,30 mm total infeed
G81/0

The Depth of Bore with Spiral Drill

Kind holes are dimensioned down to the
fiat ground of the bcre.
If you want 'co calculate the tool length
you either scratch the surface with the
point of the drill tit or you take
measurement of the length of •the tool.
In order to program the indicated depth
of bore you nave to add the length of
the tool point.
H

tg3O °

2

H = tg30

0

x

d
7

Chart
Drill
dia. in mm
2
4

6

8
10
12
14
16

•

11 (mm)
0.57
1.15
1.73
2.30
2.89
3.46
4.04
4.6/

Drill Data for the Tool Sheet
Always deduct value H from the
measured data when you enter it.
You need not to calculate anymore and
can program the dimensions of the
drawing directly.
Tool Data Sheet
T1

T2

T3

T5

T4

T6

T7

T8

d
D=
F

2

t
S
HZ
HZK
d
D
F
1
S
Hz
Hzic

Cutter dia.
(mm)
(mm) . . ... ....... Cutter radius
(mm/min)
Feed speed
Max. milting depth
(mm)
Spindle speed
(U/min)
Difference measure
(mm)
Corrected difference measure
(mm)

Zero-point of workpiece
Start position
Tool change position

Vertical axis system

Horizontal axis system
+t)

Z

+X

4,

4011.1111111111,

Zero-point offset (G92)
X

mm

Y

mm

Z

mm

Drawing no :
Denomination:
Workpiece material:
Program no.
Name:
Date:
LT

it..
7.

ei,11::•_.._._..


!

7

v

• 1.':.i.). • N 771)
•

vi

_

•

r

_ _--. 1 1 1
..

,

ti 1_ - - !i . - 1
_i_
------ ---. 'i,-(t ./
Chapter 7
The M-Functions
Mi

The M-Functions
Miscellaneous or switching functions.

MOO - Program Hold

If you program MOO in a block, then
the program will be interrupted.
Continuation of the program: press
Ffa1 key.
When Do We Program MOO?
-

Tool change
Take measurements
Switch to hand operation
Carry out corrections
etc.

M30 - Program End

N

X (iD)

(K,S)

F LT)

000

In the last block of a program you
have to program M30. Otherwise the
alarm sign A05 will appear.
After M30 the program jumps automatically tc NOO. You can start anew.

'120 tel3o

If the ONC interface is mounted, M30
switches off the mair. spindle (M03
is cancelled).
M2

M03 - Milling Spindle on
(only with accessory DNC-Interface)

M 03

The M03 instruction switches on the
milling spindle. Switch the milling
spindle on such that the motor has
enough time to run up and that you
are in position to set the right rpm.
Important note M03
Before pushing the start key the
main spindle switch has to be set
to CNC-position.

M05 - Milling Spindle Off
(only with accessory DNC-Interface)

Format M05

t

When do we

N3/M05

iTogram 1405?

- Before a tool. change

- Before taking measurements
Note:
M30 switches off the milling spindle
too
M06 switches off the milling spindle
O.
if T(F)
M3

M06 - Tool Lengths Compensation

Compare cnapter Tool LengthsCompensation

M17 - Jump Back into Main Program

Compare Subroutines

M99 - Circle Parameter

Compare Circle Programming

M08, M09, M20, M21, M23, M26 are
as switching functions not yet defined.
with. them you could activate peripherical devices (under preparation!)
Chapter 8
Input of Program, Corrections, Operation
Survey
What happens when data is put in?
Input format
Indication on the screen
Input of program
Operating elements CNC; Program input
Option key hand operation — CNC operation
The word indication
The figure keys, the minus key
The memory keylINPI
The l -31 key
Thei FWDIkey

ThefREVIkey
The( DELI key
Input of M-values
Take-over of registered values
Inserting and deleting of blocks
Deleting of a registered program
Program Sequence
Testrun
Single block operation
Automatic operation
Interventions during program flow
— Program stop
-- Program hold

8.1
8.2-8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6-8.7
8.9
8.9
8.10
8.12
8.13
8.14
8.15
8.16
8.17
8.18
8.19
8.20
8.21
8.23
8.25
8.26-8.27
8.29
8.31-8.33
Input of Program
Corrections
Operation
The knobs, displays, symbols, etc. will
confuse you in the beginning.
So first put in the very simple programs
and check the various function -keys. In
half an hour you will be accustomed to
them.
S u ry e y

Data Input, Correction, Delete
Storing a word

Sequence of Program
Testrun:
Inching through the program

FITTj

Take over of values

Single block operation

Correcting a word
Put in
P24]-4.
v alue

7

+

••--•

M-programming

(first number key)

Press g

Automatic operation

Searching

a word

Searching a block
FWD

iSTAR1

Influencing the Program

riR8C71

Inserting a block
;Aal + riNiq

Deleting a block
+

;DEL]

Termination
[INP1 +IRE

A

In terruption
+ IFWDi

Deleting a program
(DELI + (MP'
(first DEL)
set

Storing of Program I

program to NOO

IINPi + 'TZTV

Compare tape operation
RS-232 C operation

with

N
What happens when Data is put in?
We put in GO!.

Secretary iinterface element) reports
to director:
Somebody wants G01!

,

•

4. The director instructs the memory
operating program (RAM = Random
access memory):
Rememher G011

• _ Nod.1

Director CPU = Central Processing
Unit = Microprocessor) asks his specialists:

5. The memory reports to the director:

0.k,,, I have noted it down!

Can we execute GOI?

•

3. The specialists (EPROM = Programmable
read-only memory) think and inform
the director:
Yes we can1

R

6. Director instructs his press-speaker

(output element):
Show them out there, that we are
clear with GOl. We have everything
understood and are ready for further
inputs!
Data input

What happens when Data is put in?

Digital read-out

Data Input

Interface element
(secretary)

Central processing
unit = Microprocessor
(Director)

Operating program =
EPROMS (Specialists)

Memory = RAM

Output element
(press speaker)
The Block Format or Input Format
According to the key number (G-, M--functions) you have to put in the required
information.
The computer will ask these informations.

X

G	

we—

1111

(M)

(0)

(.1)

migrimmo_p
F

rift INP
IMEM51.11111

Example:
If you press INP after the G90 input,
the indication jumps to the next block.
number.

04

N

00

04

G
(M)

X

(4

Y

(0)	

(K)

(S)

Z

F
(L) (T) (H)

BEEMIllin
MI

IM

Example:
You have entered the X,Y-values with
GOO. After the registration of the Yvalue the indication jumps to the
next block number.
Why?

The computer knows
polate only in two
of X- and Y-values
automatically to 0
programming).

G

(M)

X
(J) (0)

N

G
(M)

00

DO

{J)
C

Z

Lloo

0

00

.Y
(k) (S)

X

(0)

Y
(X) (S)

D

c===p

Z

F
(L) (1) (H)

111.1
IIIIII
F
(L) (T) (H)

C=J--------

that it can interplanes. After input
it sets the Z-value
(with incremental

Example:
If you, however, have programmed the
X-value with zero, the computer will
ask for a Z-value.

Example:
With absolute programming mode the computer asks all three values X,Y,Z.
You have to tell the computer the plane
from which it has to start the movements.

fl A
Indication on the Screen

Mode of operation absolute - incremental:
CNC OPERATION
INIGI

XI

INCR.
VI

z IF!

1. When switching on the CNC-operation
the control is in incremental operating mode.
2.

If you program G90 or G92 the screen
shows the absolute operating mode.

3.

If you program G25 or G27 the display
disappears. The computer recognizes
this only in the program run.

CNC OPERATION ABS.
INIGI

x I

Y i

Z IF

Mode of operation metric - inch:
According to the position of the option
switch the metric or inch mode of opera-

tion will be indicated.

Metric 0,01 mm
Inch 0,001

CNC OPERATION ABS.0.01MM1

NIG'

x! Yi Z!Fl

Vertical or horizontal axis system
_L Vertical
Horizontal
These symbols indicate which axis system
is in operation.
Input of program

30o

Example
X

N

Start

30oo

0

QO

-04

DO

02

Program end

(Kt

J) (DS

V

5

2

(UT (I-s)

0

0

Mao

0

0

--1

—Zoo()

;41 1. Switch on main switch

T1F Control lamp for current
supply and lamp for mode of
l•
71: operation hand-operation
are on,

EE

N G XYZ F

H/C

o Kg)

L

23
ACC
mm /mm.

N G XYZ F

O 0CLIDOO

r

2. Press key

0001:000
	

D,J K LT M

00

D.J K

jo

LJ M

h/C

The control unit is switched

over to CNC-mode of operataon.
On the digital read-out the

lamp of address N is on. 00
(NOO) is shown.

CNC OPERATION
N G
IL GO
01 I

X

The screen shows N

Y

09.1

1

3. Press key!INP
N G XYZ F

O 0CLIDOO
D,J K L;T

1NP

M

/Mb

0

N G XYZ •F

O 000
D,J K LX M

00

N G X YZ F

1NP

O 0=000
0,J K LT M

CNC OPERATION
N!GjX1Y
• 00L____!
: 01!

CNC OPERATION

4. Put in G-information
0

N
001-071,
011

0

00 shows on the digital read-

out.

CNC OPERATION
NG
00 Oa
01

With INPIyou instruct the computer to register NOO. The
address letter jumps to G.

XIV'
I

5. Press keyIINPl Address inilcation jumps to X.
N G XYZ

F

CNc OPERATION

00CCD00
D,J K
t:r M
i
i

3 0 10 01

30001

N

G XYZ

1

F

r---..

F

Z

:N G
00i 00

: Oil

0

N

GXYZ F

0 0 CCD 0 0
D.J K

LX M

•

!

X
i

0

N • G , XI
001 001 30001
I LTI
1
!

N G XYZ F
DJ K

NIG
X :
00! 00 30001
., at:

—
8. Put in y -value 1.0.
•

..
9. Press IINP! Display jumps

CNC OPERATION

00CCDOO
13' M

L_.

O

N G XYZ

1NP

....0:.
,

CNC OPERATION

I

111P
4
/

INP!. Display jumps

:

Y

3000i
:

Press
to Y.

:

CNC OPERATION

0 0 : CCD 0 0
DJ K
S M

0

01[

.

7.

Y;

: 001 00; 3000i

I

G XY

6. Put in X-value 130001.

:Y

X !

•N;G:

,

N

X

CNC OPERATION

0 0 D.J K 0 0
CEOLT M

1NP

00:. 0099_91,
C!

N.OL

:,

F

00CCDOO
D,J K

L

•

LT M

0

!

i

Y;z
OF 1
•
.

Z.
tO

V L Z
0 1, _..._0I

CN C OPERATION
N,G: x
00i oo. 3000,

Y
0

Put in Z-value

D.

11. Press 0101. Block NO0 is
entered. Block indication
jumps to N01.
12. Enter block NOl ' in the
same way. Put in the Minus sign after the number value.

•

13, M30 (rogram end)

M

3

N G XYZ

F

Co 0 CliD 0 0
D.J K

LX
30'

CNC: OPERATION
Y!
0!

00101

0

01

03E1

START

TART

I

Put in NO2
- Display is at G.
- Press key 0 then the Maddress is indicated.
- Put in the figure value.
- Press IINPI.
-

.NIGI X 1
! 00 001 30001

1

14. Press keyISTARTI, Display
jumps to NO0 (only if M30
is programmed).
15. Press key START
gram runs.

the pro-
Operating Elements - CNC

Program Input

Option Key Hand-Operation/CNC-Operation
H/C

0003000
ch..} K
N G XYZ F

0

DEL
REV

F
By pressing key

FWD

H/C

the mode of operation

changes from hand-operation to CNC-,
operation.
The relative mode of operation is indicated by the lamps 2
0

(CNC-operation) or

(hand-operation).

To put in a program it has to be switched
to CNC-operation.
In the CNC-mode of operation you cannot
move the slides by hand anymore.
The Word Indication
The lamps and light bars of the word
indication show you which data you can
put in.

Digital read-out

Monitor

The actual words are indicated by
lamps

The actual words are indicated by a
light bar.

N G XYZ F
0 0 CCD 0 0

CNC - OPERATION
N G; X
1 00
01

Y

Address indication G, M function
If depends on G or M-functions which addresses and/or data are required?
E.g. M06

M06 requires a D,S,Z,T information.

Digital read-out

Monitor

The X-indication is also valid for the
D-value, the Y-indication for the S-value and the F-indication for the Tvalue if M06 was programmed.

The address letter D,S,T are indicated.

OPERATION
N G
1 00
•
01
02

031,4060

X

Y

F
The Indication of Addresses
D, J, K, L, M on the Screen

CNC OPERATION
NLG

X!

G25/G27

`/H ZIFI

The address letter L is indicated.
(L = jump address, subroutine
address)

Format MO6

CNC OPERATION
INIGI

X

.

Y

Addresses
- D (milling cutter radius)
- S (spindle speed)
- T (tool number)
axe indicated.

Format M99
Addresses
- J (start of arc of circle)
- K (end of arc of circle)
are indicated.

NG
0 0

Attention:
X,Y,F lamps ' are valid for various
addresses.
The Figure Keys

You use the figure keys in order to enter the various values for address letters
X,Y,Z,F,G,M,D,T,L,J,K.
The entered values appear on the digital
read-out and/or on the screen of the monitor.

Fr] H.
-

The Minus-Sign Key ID
N G XYZ F

O 0=000
D,J K

L.J

1

°

9 I NP

H/C

6 DEL

M

2 3 REV 65
FWD

0

1,4j
R1

X,Y,Z values can have a minus or a plus
sign.

Pius sign input for X, Y, Z:
Put in figures only.

N G XYZ F

O 0CCIDOO
K

LX M

1400 0
H/C

Minus sign input
After input of figures, press EL] key.
The minus sign appears as a bar on the
digital read-out.

M

Example:

tit

X = -1400

Input: Ly4 PEI
The fistiiiKey = Memory Key

]INP! = Abbreviation for . Input

LIN

= Instruction to the computer to
register the entered value.
N G XYZ F

0003)00
D.J K L,T M

1

89
4 5 6
1 2 3
— 0 -4-

Digital read-out
N G XYZ F

r

DEL
REV
FWD

FTAPT

Example

23501

- Entex value12350 The number
appears for your information
only, it is not in the computer yet.

00CICI►OO
K

M

718 9I TWP-1

Monitor

CNC OPERATION

K L,T M

N G XYZ F

d

IINP

Lamp X lights up.

0001:11D00

L

I

o

H/C

- You press INP. By pressing
this key, figures are registered; at the same time
the number 2350 disappears
and the light jumps to the
next address letter.

M

Note
With1INPi you can also jump forward in the
block.

, N G _x_ Y
235000I
01!
The

Key

Instruction: to jump forward within one block

0003000
M
N G XYZ F

'4W7

III;

0
5
5

IN
700

ro
aar..
rnrn In. n.

F

D,J K L3

0
H/C

111

'CIART

the program will
By pressing the key /-10
jump to the next word. The entered value
of the next word will appear on the digital read-out(Permanent function when you keep on pressing the key)

0 .1

A
The FWD Key
Instruction: to jump forward block-by-block

N G XYZ F

000137300

Mw

0

D.J K LT M

:s3r,

-5	

).743

I r,-1]

0

111111E111

NEI

X
(J) (D)

(K)

y

(S)

(L) (T) (H)

1. A given word is displayed. By pressing the IFWD1 key the program jumps to
the next block numher.

2. If a block number is indicated: when
pressing the FIE key the program
jumps to the next block number.
F
(L)

(H)

3. If you keep the iniD key pressed down,
the program will jump block-by-block
to the program end.
The 1:1E■ii Key
Instruction: to jump back in program blocky-by-block

7+
— i/1/-

r-T-7n

7 8 9j 11NP
4 5 6 DEL
1 2 3 REV
FWD
0
.1-

tzl

Function:
1. A given word is on the display.
If you press key iREVI the program jumps
to block number N.

X
(J)

;01

(K)

(L.) Mill)

(S)

2. If block number N is indicated and you
press keyiREVI, then the program will
jump to the previous block number.

N

(M)

(J)

(D)

(K)

(S)

z

(l)(T) (HI

3. If you keep the W.Ol key pressed the
block number jumps back to NCO (permanent function).
The DEL Key
= Delete key, correction key

DEL is the abbreviation of delete,
which means to cancel, to extinguish.

N G XYZ F

O 0 CCD 0 0
D,J K LT M

O

••■••••■••

Ito

H/C

You can delete only the value of the
address letter which is indicated. If
you correct a X-value e.g., the address
letter X has to be on the digital readout.

DEL

Attention:

REV
FWD

START

With IDELIonly the digital read-out is
cancelled, not the value in the register.
You must put in a new value and store
it with [INPJ.

N G x Y2 F
O 0 CED 0 0
D,J K LT m

520

0
HIC

[+1
r

Example: You want to change value X from
520 to 250.

1. Press DELI key, the value 52C will disappear.

N G XYZ F

O 000
D,J K tT m

L

250

2. Put in the correct value (250).
H/C

r

3.

key, value X is registered;
light jumps to the next address letter.

PresslINPI
Input of M-Values

0
If you want to put in M-values: at
first you have to select the M-key.
The M--value is programmed in the
G-column.

L_J

r

N

G XYZ F

00CCD00
D,J K LT

m

3

0

Input: M30
Address G has to be shown

INP

4 5

N

Monitor

Example

Digital read-out

6 DFL

H/C

M

G XYZ F

N G: X
00

Press P,T

Put in

0 0 OM 0 0

CNC OPERATIONS

ill

30 0

CNC OPERATION

D,J K LT M ••

N;G: X

Press IINT] (register)
,

oo(

H/C
14 M3^i

Attention:
▪ M-values are not taken over by
pressing INP
-i- If you press INP after M30, the
program jumps back to NOO.

A 1S

Y
Take-Over of registered Values into the
following Blocks
By pressing [INPIthe register takes over
the previously entered value of the relative word column.

N

G
{M)

rr

00

X
(J) (D)

2000

Y
(K) (S)
300o

0

0

04

02
03

F
(L)(T)(H)

Z

-4000

Example 1
- G--address is shown
INPS
- G-value flashes shortly and Is registered
- Word indication jumps forward

INP

r

N

G
(M)

X
(J) )D)

(K) (S)

00

00

2. oo

30oo

01

00

0

0.Z

04

200o

F
(L)(T)(H)

•

0

0

0
000

Z
.
-

-70-Ei

4

goo

0

04
INP

- -

Example 2
- You want to put in the value Z=0 in
block NO3,
- You happen to see that the Z-value
in block NO1 should he -1000 and
correct the value.
- After correction you carry on with
the Z-value input of block NO3.
- If you press!INP[the register takes
over the previously entered Z-value,
i.e. -1000.

Attention:
M-values and inputs are not taken over
with IINP1
Inserting and Deleting of Blocks

N G XYZ F

yil4- -nserting a block
;,_7J
Deleting a block

0001:000

K

CC

1.7

rk..

1

mmm.m.
7 8

12

45 i

H

1

.—

.

--170
,INPi !0-

63

!

Remark 1:
First press key viand
(keep1,--, !pressed).

Remark 2:
Perranent function when you carry on
pressing (more than 0,6 sec.), i.e.
you insert permanently empty Ilnes •.A74Ch

I

,REV .1;

0

}L °f

then key INPI

ids R

G21.

N G XYZ F

Example: Inserting

0 0 CUD 0 0
D,J K L;T M

+ Digital read-out shows block a02

02

M
IIIIII
•
all
TM
(J) X (D)

0

00

00

4

MEI
04 ga
0

00

03

r

00
01
2

01

o

2.

0

F
(L) CT) (H)

Z
0

0

o

o

400
400

0

0

►►
r

=
2.5o

0t
0

•
.0

loo

0

0

400

C1

►o

OS

3o

00

00

04

04

0
0

Press

FITTIT1

+ In block NO2, G21 is automatically
written.
+ The original block NO2 is automatically changed over to NO3 - also all
subseauent blocks to the next block
number.
+ In block NO2 you can program required
instructions as you want.

Procedure

0

01

[INP1

1 0

26-0

03

04

0

1500

0
►

IN

+ Delete G21
+ Put in wanted bleCK

Do

0
0

0
- do

400

Example: Deleting

IDEL]

+ Digital read-out shows NO2
Press!,-.../14DELI
NO2 is deleted
All subsequent blocks are backnumaered: NO3 - NO2, N04 - NO3, etc'.
Deleting of a registered Program

Possibility 1
N G XYZ F

00C1CDOO
D,J K
L,T

Switch off main switch.

o

Possibility 2
Press emergency stop button.

r

1START

Procedure

N G XYZ F

00CCIDOO
D.J I

Possibility 3
A certain block number is indicated
(NOO, N01, NO2 ...).

M

00

First press key
mains pressed).

IDEL1

then

IINI
D

1 (DEL re-

The registered program is deleted.
The digital read-out shows NOO.
The Program Sequence

1. Testrun
The program runs in the computer. There
are no instructions given for slide
movements.

2. Single-block operation
The program is worked off block by
block. The slides move as programmed.

3. Automatic operation
The total program is worked off.
Switching instructions are carried
out.
1) Testrun
The program runs in the mind. The instructions for slide movements are not
given.

Purpose of the testrun:
- Block mistakes are shown.
- With absolute programming mistakes of
the linear or circular interpolation
are indicated (e.g. if you programmed
movement in 3 planes simultaneously
or you determined the target point of
the quadrant uncorrectly, etc.).
If you have programmed subroutines or
jump instructions you can check the order of the instructions.

Activation of testrun:
1. CNC-operation
2. Indication has to be on N-address
00 00
0
00 2400
01
02 MOE, D Coo
03 t
2 o

3. Press 1I-key:
the indicated block is worked off.
Soo

4. Press Ej-key:
The following block is worked off.
etc.
2) Single block operation
In the testrun you do not see whether
you run with e.g. GOO into the workpiece
or whether i directions are correct.
This you see in the single block- or in
the automatic operation.

Example:
1. Block N000
- Block indication is at N000.

1

Press key 1, then key START (key 1
has to remain pressed).

Block N000 is worked off.

1
The screen shows dwell in block
N001.
2. Block N001

Press again

rs1ART1.

Block N001 is worked off.

The screen shows dwell in block NO02.
In this way the program can run in
single block operation.
Single block operation
(continued)

Various blocks In single block
operation:
If you e.g. press keys DI+ rSTAR'Il there
will be 3 blocks worked off. You can
work off up to 9 blocks in one go(0
1..START1)

Dwell in single block operation
+1FWDI.
Press
The slides stop.

If you pressLSTART the program continues.

Interruption of program
Press 4111)1 I REvi
The program jumps back to N000.
3) Automatic operation

G
(M)

X
(J) (D)

Y

(K) (S)

2

- Set block indication to N000.
Possibilit 1

01

(Is

.

•
.

zit

la11. El
MIMI

NM
mo 11111111.

OEM 30

Press

1

12E 111

key, until NO00 is indicated.

Possibility 2

Display shows any given block number.
Press 'INF' IAREM, indication jumps to
NOO.
- Press key [STARTI. The program runs until a hold or until M30.

To continue program after hold
Press key !START

Program Hold
- Programmed hold MOO.
- In connection with M06, if under the
address T (F) a number 1. to 499 is programmed (with inch operating mode 1 to
199). If under T=O is programmed, there
is no hold.
Interventions during Program Flow
1. Program stop
2. Programm interruption

1. Program stop
INP -

P.0. The program jumps
Press keys [El— 1-1-PI
back to NOO (start).

Pay attention:
If you press 171key after 5114 	
the program starts with NOO. Your tool
is not in starting position! Collision!

New start: Measures
Position the tool in program start position.

Sonst Kollisionsgefahr and falscher
Programmablauf
2. Program Interruption
INP1

iFC61D

The program is stopped.

00CED00
p
N G X YZ F

To continue program:

.JK LT m

Press key LS TART1.
0

■••■••■•

Why program interruption?

INP
DEL
tit

FWD

You may e.g.
- change the feed
- take measurements
- switch over to hand operation and carry out a correction by hand
correct program, etc.

Effectiveness of Corrections with Program
Interruption

LINP

/r

[F WDi

1. Corrections of feed:
Feed corrections become effective in
the interrupted block.'
2. Corrections of G,M,X,Y,Z-values in
the interrupted block are only effective in the following program run.
3. Corrections of G,M,X,Y,Z-values in
subsequent blocks will be effective
when the program is continued.
9. ALARM SIGNS
9.1
• Purpose of alarm signs
9.2
• Procedure in the computer when
input is wrong
9.4
• Alarm survey, possible inputs
• Measure when alarm sign appears
9.5
9.7 9.15
• Alarm signs, details
A5: M30 instruction missing
WithiSTARTithe computer checks if M30
(program end) was programmed.

A6: M03 instruction missing
(M03 main spindle ON)
This alarm only appears if threading
cycles are programmed.
Attention:
The main spindle switch has to be in
CNC-position!

A08
A09
A10
All
Al2
A14

Compare tape operation

A13: inch/mm or vertical/horizontal
switch with full program memory
This alarm cannot be cancelled by [INPJ
IEV/ , You have to switch back into the
original position. If you nave put in
a vertical mill program with switch position at horizontal mill, you have to
enter the program new (with correct
switch position.

A15: Wrong V-value
For admissible data see chart.
A-16—A17

A16: Cutter radius data missing
If a G72,G45,G46,047,G48 instruction is
called, there has to be programmed a
MO6 information with cutter radius data
(D) in one of the previous blocks. Without this information the computer cannot calculate the center point path,

A17: Wrong subroutine
If a subroutine is nested more than 5
times, an alarm is shown.

A18: Movement of cutter radius compensation smaller 0
Example: substract cutter radius once
:446

G46
GOO/X3000/Y=0/Z=0
Cutter moves 30 minus 5 = 25 mm

M06/D500/5..../
G46
GOO/X500/Y=-0/Z=0
No movement
Cutter radius = traverse movement

M06/0500/S....
G46
GOO/X300/Y=0/Z=0
Aiarm
Movement X= 300 is smaller than cutter
radius. 300 minus 500 = -200.
A17

Special case — Alarm Al 8 with pocketing
The first measure for the pocket has to
be larger or equal.
Cutter dia + 0,1 cutter dia.

Example:
Cutter dia. 10 mm
Minimum measure for pocket
d+0,1
0,1

10 + 0,1 x 10

10,1 mm

Reason:
Finishing cut 2 x 0,1 R (radius) is
fixed. in cycle G72.

01xR
Alarm/Measures

Alarm Signs
Purpose of alarm signs:
If you put in and store data which the computer does not know, if you forget something or program a wrong block, then the
computer gives an alarm sign.:
The alarm sign appears on the digital
read-out in form of a certain alarm number,
on the monitor you get a commentary too.

N G XYZ F
0 0 CED 0 CO
D,J K
M

AL

01

CNC-OPERATION
INIGI

X

ViZ !Fx

A01 WRONG G/M INSTRUCTION
Data Input,

What happens when wrong data is put in — Alarm sign

We put in a X-value 50000, i.e. for the
cross slide a traverse path of 500 mm.
1. The secretary (interface element) reports:
They want X = 50000!
2. The director (central processing unit,
microprocessor) asks his specialists:
Can

we execute X = 50000?

3. The specialists (operating program)
answer:
No, Mister Director! X 50000 is too
high!
4. The director instructs his speaker
(output. element):
Tell them out there, we cannot do it!
X 50000 is too high, put in alarm sigp
A02!
Data input

What happens when wrong Data is put in?

Data on digital read-out

Data Input:

Central processing
unit = Microprocessor
(Director)

Operating program
= EPROM
(specialists)

Output element
(Press.
Speaker)
Alarm-survey, inputs

Alarm Signs
(Survey)
A00: Wrong G/M instruction

A8:

Tape end with tape operation SAVE

A01: Wrong radius/M99

A9:

Program not. found

A02: Wrong X-value

A10: Writing protection active

A03: Wrong F-value

All: Loading mistake

A04: Wrong Z-value

Al2: Checking mistake

A5:
A6:

M03 instruction missing

A7:

A13: Inch/mm switching with full program memory

M30 instruction missing
No significance

A14: Wrong mill head position/path unit
with LOAD 1. /M or ---1 /M
A15: Wrong Y-value
A16: Cutter radius data missing
A17: Wrong subroutine
Ale: Movement cutter radius compensation smaller 0

Possible Inputs
(otherwise alarms possible)

Inch

Metric
Values

Values Fineness (inch)

Fineness .(mm)

XD

0-19999

1/100 mm

0-7999

1/1000

Xrd

0-9999

1/100 mm

0-3999

1/1000

YV

0-9999

1/100 mm

0-3999

1/1000

YH

0-19999

1/100 mm

0-7999

1/1000

0-7999

1/1000

A_

ZVH

0-19999

1/100 mm

Radii

0-9999

1/100 mm

0-3999

1/1000

D(X) milling cutter
radius with M06

0-9999

1/100 mm

0-3999

1/1000

F

2-499

mm/min

2-199

1/10/min

T(F) tool address
M06

.0-499

0-199

1

1

L(F) jump instruotion: G27

0-221

H(F) exit signs M26

0-299

J/K circular parameter

0-90
Alarm/Measures

Measures when Alarm appears
Alarm is on

REV

1NP

Alarm indication disappears

DEL

Cancel wrong value

Put in correct value

INP

Store

Note:
- Alarm A13 can be cancelled only by operating the option switch metric/inch, horizontal/vertical.
- Alarm sign of tape operation please compare chapter tape operation.
A00—A01

A00: Wrong G/M instruction
Example: G12, M55

A01: Wrong radius/M99
+Y

X.1000
Y.1500

Possibility 1: Radius larger than admissible values
Possibility 2: Wrong value for end
coordinates PE of
quarter arc
Example: incremental value programming
N.,./G02/X1000/Y1500/
Coordinates X=1000/Y=1500 cannot be
end coordinate of quarter arc.

Example: absolute value programming

N
00

11
4

X

90
01
02
M30

Y

3000
4000

G

2000
1000

Z

0
30

1

F

100
100

I

Alarm

- In block NO1 point P1 is programmed.
- In block NO2 the quarter aro is
programmed (coordinate P2). The X,Y
values are correct.
The Z-value would mean a circular interpolation in space (helix). This the
computer does not know.
The
not
but
tic

alarm sign in this example does
appear when the program is put in
is on during the test run, automaor single block operation.

Explanation:

At programinput the computer just checks
the contents of one block, it does not
check the Z-value of the previous block.
A02—A04

A2: Wrong X-value
Compare chart for admissible values,

A3: Wrong F-value
Compare chart for admissible values.

A4: Wrong Z-value
Possibility 1: Admissible Z-value surpassed (compare chart)
Possibility 2: Threedimensional movement with absolute value
programming
This alarm appears only in the test
run, single block or automatic operation because the mistake cannot be
recognized at program input (computer
does not check contents of previous
blocks at program input).
Example:

0

11
10

.

1

1

,
,
90

L

00

00

x

0
E

3000 ,

Y

1500
0

z

F

300
(0)

Alarm

Monitor shows: Wrong Z-value; the computer accepts the - X,Y values since it
can carry out this interpolation and indicates the value shown last as being
wrong value.
Attention:
Maybe you wanted to program Z=0 and
Y1500 instead of 0. The computer cannot
know this. The computer indicates Z as
wrong value since it does not know your
thoughts.
Chapter 10
Casette Operation
RS-232 C Operation
Magnetic tape operation

Magnetic Tape Operation
The ta p e enables you to store programs
and to feed them into the computer memory.

1. Storing on tape
To transmit from computer memory to
tape: We call this mode of operation
SAVE or CHECK.

2. From tape into computer
To transmit the program from tape into the commuter memory: We call this
mode of operation LOAD.

Some data
- n.:mory capacity pet tape side: approx.
400 blocks.
- Operation time per tape side: approx.
90 sec.

Operation advice
1.

only

cassettes

. Erase: new cassettes completely (see
• page 7.23). The test impulse from
the final control o!1' the producer can
cause Alarm All or Al2.

3. Main drive motor must not run during
LOAD, CHECK, SAVE and ERASE operation.
4. Do not put down tape near main motor.
Modes of operation SAVE/CHECK

Magnetic Tape Operation
Transmission of a program from machine memory to magnetic tape
Mode of operation
SAVE = transmit from machine memory to magnetic tape
CHECK = control of transmitted (loaded) program

1. Press key[- ► iuntil word indication G lights up. Press key DELl.
The indicated value disappears from the digital read-out.

2. Put in G65.
Press keys Cry INP. -On the read-out you see C indicated.LL
magnetic cassette tape operation.

3. Press keyriTs7F4

On the read-out appears 51 TILL'	 j

4. Put in program number.
You can put in figures 000 099
co - 09
o - 999
The sequence of the figures can be chosen as you like. Example for
input of a program with number 76: Press keys

5. Press key LINPI.
The transmission / loading starts.
5.1. First free space on the tape is sought.
If there are not data on the tape, it will advance approx. 4 seconds and rewind approx. 2 seconds.

Band without data on:

4 sec. advance
2 sec. rewind'

-4Tape begin
Tape end

Transmission SAVE
Modes of operation SAVE/CHECK

If there are already data,programs loaded on the tape, then the tape
will advance to the end of the program which was loaded last. Then
adv. ance 4 seconds and rewind 2 seconds.

pro-rams a:ready
4

sec. advance

2 sec. rewind

2 sec.
Program 2

2 sec.

1
,''' .7 Pro g ram

j Tape begin

Transmission SAVE

3.2. Transmission operation SAVE

The digital read-out indicates

C
,A
SA is the abbreviation for ZAVE.
The program/data are saved from the machine memory - where they
could be deleted - onto the tape.
5.3. At the end of the transmission o p eration the ta p e rewinds tc the
tape start.

5.4. Control o p eration CHECK
Cj L L HJJJ
The digital read-out indicates
C
The data in the machine memor y are compared with the data loaded on
the tape.
If you have already programs loaded on the tape, then the digital
read-out will indicate these on the read-out whilst the tape advances. It will advance to the program loaded last and then the

CHECK will be carried out.

CHECK of loaded program

0-Program 3 L1 Program 2 Ff Program

L

!C

•

3

2;

G

1

1Y,!

6. After CHECK the tape rewinds. The program is loaded on the tape.

Please never take out tape during operation!
Mode of operation LOAD

Transmission of program from tape to machine memory
Mode of operation LOAD

1. Press key [-1►1 until word indication G lights up. If a figure of the
6-function appears, press key DEL. Then indication on read-cut
disappears.

2. Put in 065.
Press keys

EcIE

INP . Read-out indicates

ir- 1

1

3. Press key INP.
Read-out indicates
4. Put in number of program.
E.g. for program number 76 you press keys 1777iL On read-out; Lc

1

PL.

6:

5. Press keylINPI.
5.1. The program number CC is looked for.
If you have other programs on the tape already, then these numbers
appear on the digital read-out.
E.g. IC

P:214

or

[c

[715

5.2. Loading:
When the wanted program 76 is found, the loading operation starts.
On the digital read-out you see TE]
LO is the abbreviation for load.
5.3. After the loading is done, the tape rewinds. The read-out shows NOO.
Program number 76 is stored in the machine computer.

6. If you press keyISTART) then the program starts operating.

Program 76 1 Program 75 _LT- Program 74. j Tape begin
rrET

0

P

7151

is

L7
P„.._,

1_
4
Summary

From machine to tape

From tape to machine

SAVE, CHECK

LOAD

1. Put. in C, 65

r
,

I. P-- in G65

•

Press ITi,ii
1

Li

Press rINP!

3.

Press rP-Ticj

. q ii.F...L ;1

l I P i :177,

5. Press INP
Program is sought and will be
loaded in machine.

r---T ,i
iC1

,c

1
± LP i .L__.;

Ls1 i__L__:_i
5. Press [INPI

- Free space on tape is sought.
- Machine program is transmitted/
loaded on tape (SAVE)

Io j

IC
-

iSIAI

If program is loaded in machine, then read-out indicates:
N

•

lc

HI

1

If operation is through,
dication on read-out:

then in-

N

•

•

oo____J

Program can be started.

6.

j

Loaded program on tape is checked,
compared with machine program.
I

6.

--7-1

Put in program number

Put in program number

g

!-, ..1.1.:
.

t___,_i

2. Pressi

4.

•

6 If-i

L.

1c i

r,

r-T---m-

i

1,

io

0
Alarm sign

Alarm Signs — Tape Operation
(Summary)

A08 - Tap e end reached during loading of
program from machine memory to
tape only with node of operation
SAVE)
A09 - Selected program cannot be found
(mode of operation LOAD). Tape is
full. M06 is not put in in selected
program (mode of operation LOAD).
Alo - Writing protection active
All - Loading mistake
Al2 - Checking mistake

General
When switching off machine (also when current breaks down) an Interference pulse
is put onto the tape. This interference
pulse does not have any effect since the
loading start only after 2 seconds ct
ta p e advance.
Thus:
Tape has to be rewind (automatically). Never cake tape out during rewind operation.

Tape cegin

7
First program starts
after 2 seconds,

Empty space, interTerence pulses ineffective.
Alarm sign A08

Alarm sign A08:
Only when using mode of operation SAVE!

Reason

Measures

Tape finish during loading (SAVE) from
machine memory to tape.
(A08 only when using mode SAVE)

- Press FEEY and REV

Alarm sign A08 appears on digital read-

Tape rewinds to tape begin.
Digital read-out indicates N00.
- Put in new tape and repeat loading
operation.

out.

Program length

7t

j Tape begin
Tape end

Attention:
If you put in this tape and want to load
the next finished program transmit from
tape to machine memory) A09 appears  No
program end found!
Alarm sign

Auti

Alarm sign A09:
Only when using mode of operation LOAD!

A09 - Reason 1

Measures

Selected program not found.
If you call a non-existing program number when loading ;from ta p e to machine
memory), then alarm A09 appears.

- PressiINP + 1REvl
The tape rewinds. The digital read-cut
indicates after chat NOO.

- Look for program on another tape (in
case you are sure you put it in).

Example: You Look. on this tape for prcno. n
Pr.NrhE.

A09 - Reason 2

Measures

Selected progran not fully on ta p e (m06),
since tape was finished when loading
from machine memory to tape (already in
mode o!f operation SAVE you had alarm A06).

- Press [INP1 +Fa]
Tape rewinds, read-out indicates NOC,

- Look for program on other tape (in case
you are sure that you put it in;

Example: You call. on program no.19

Program do es not nave M06, thus alarm
AOb was indicated aiready during mode of
operation SAVE.
[

19

IA

17

16
Alarm sign Al 0 Alarm sign Al 1

A10 - Writing protection active:
Only when using mode of operation SAVE and ERASE!

(A-11 ,

If you remove the writing protection
(i.e. the black caps) you cannot put
any more data cn this tape side.

crA*;

Measures:

If you put in such a tape side and
you want to transmit a nrogram from
the machine memory to the !ape, alarm

PressLTN +LREV1
Tape rewinds, put ii other tape or mount.
writing protection again,

sign Alo appears.

Al 1 - Load mistake:
Only when using mode of operation LOAD!

All - Reason 1

All - Reason 2

Motor is switched on or is being
switched on during lading (cape-machine).
The . program on the tape was not destroyed by switching on the motor.

c_'estrc,,yed. The
The program on the tape
reasons for it could be a mechanical
fault on the tape, a power failure - or
the machine was switched off when tape
was not rewound.

Measures

Measures

- Switch off motor
- Press FUTP + REvj

Transmit program t.d new tape.

The tape rewinds, the read-out indi-

cates NOO.

- Repeat loading operation.
- If you have All indicated also with
the following loading operation,

please see reason 2.

Summary measures
ALARM All

Repeat loading

N•1 ,,JI,Arm All

Alarm All

Reason was interference when
loading

Reason was mistake ,„7,n tan€
Alarm sign Al 2

Al2 - Check mistake:
Only when using mode of operation CHECK/SAVE!

Possible reasons:
- Tape faulty
- Interference p ulse: main mGtor: switc.hed
on, short power failure, interference
poise from electrial cond ...:.ctor flghtfling, switching on of soldering transformer
The interference pulses can happen both
when using mode of oberatIons SAVE or
CHECK.

Alarm sign Al2 in mode of operation SAVE - Remedy
Store program under another number.

Explanation:

Measure:

You cannot delete the false program just
by its own. Thus you have to give to
this program a new number, if you store
in on the same tape. If you would . use
the same program number, then alarm All
would appear when loading (tape - machine) since only the first one of two
identical program numbers can be called
on.

,1+ ri5571
- Put iniETT
out shows NOO.

tape rewinds, read-

- Put in same program under a new number.
- If alarm Al2 appears again, then tape
is defective.

Interference during SAVE
17

Same program has to be put in under
new program number.
•
Alarm sign Al2

Alarm sign Al2 in mode of operation CHECK

During CHECK operation there may occur
an interference impulse and alarm sign
.Al: will be indicated, without a defective tape being the reason.
Check:
- Press INP +
Tape rewinds to begin, on read-out NOO.
- Load tape into machine memory. If
there is no alarm All when loading,
then the program is o.k.
- During .Loading All is indicated: the
following is necessary - New tape, delete complete tape or put in program
anew under another number.

Measures - Summary

Repeat loading

N

NNN

4110-

No

alarm Ali:

Tape c.k,

Alarm All:
Tape defective
- New tape
- Delete tape
- Put in program under another
number.
Mode of operation ERASE

Mode of operationERASE (Erasing the tape)
1. Press :-Ieyr-47:1 ut1woLci,nedcation
figure of
C, lights um. IF you she
a C-funotIon indioated or ti:e diginal read-out, then pr,s,17,!.6tEl
Pur in GES
Pfess

INPoon the

I

diF.P

l

w

see

amp time,
1
- Pres . 747 + LDElf,
	
L
ay ye ' 4 :3ee	
c•n the
The tape 15 erased.
After tnat the read-out shows NGC

Program Interruption during Tape Operation
Only when a g ing mode of operation TOAD,
CHECK, ERASE,
Program ihnexiruiii:...n

L ---

PressINP + REVI
Tape rewinds to rape begin.

Why program interruption?
When using mode :.)L operation LOAD:
If you find cut that•you caned a nonexisting program. If you press iiP +
the tape wilL not a6van.i:e to the
nape end but rewin.ii immediately.
When using mode of operation CHECK:
If you do not want to w,utt for CnECK
operation.
When

mode of peratlon

IL is enough that you e rase atoc.t lo
seconds. When loading anew the tape
machine will erase a:rotca1i y all
other remaining tat.
Putting in the tape

When putting in the Tape, pay Attention:
1. Putting in with left spool full
- I: you. switch off the machine, the
tape advances i second.
1 sec
Tl

- if you switch on the machine, the motor rewinds the ta p e 2 seconds. So it
is made certain that the tape is at
the ver y begininq.

2. Putting in with right spool full

O

C

0‘

__

- If you put in the tape and Program
G65, then the tape rewinds to the b gigining.

- If you put in the tape and not program
G65, and switch on and off the machine,
the following happens:

Switch on:

Che tape rewinds 2 seconds.
Switch off:
The tape advances I second.

1

If you carry on like this, the tope
moves further through the switching on
arj
a;ld .;:c)
get. ar interrer7-1c
the tJpi, A sct:re
tegistered.
RS 232 Mode

RS-232 C Operation — G66
V24 Operation
20 mA Operation

RS-232 C is an international standardized
Interface.
It is an Interface for information interchange. Via this Interface data can be
transmitted to peripheric apparatus and
vice-versa.
The data are transmitted via a cable. For
the specific apparatus a cable has to be
connected by an expert.
The description how to connect cables are
found in the wiring diagrams of the producers.

Some Examples
Connecting a paper tape
puncher and paper tape reader
The program of the Fl-CNC can be punched
on a paper tape:
Vice-versa:
From a paper tape the program can he
transmitted to the F1-CNC.

Printing a program
Via the RS-232 C Interface the program
in the Fl-CNC can be printed on a list..

Connection of computers
Via RS-232 C computers and computer
systems can be linked to the Fl-CNC.
Programs can be transmitted to the
Fl-CNC and vice-versa.
For computer connection a specific
Software is necessary.
The•Software is an encoding information
which translates the code of the computer to the code of the machine. This
Software has to •be written by an expert
for the specific computer type.
KS 232 Mode

Activating RS 232:
RS 232 is activated via G. G66 does not enter the memory, it is a switching function.

Examples:
• Transmission from paper tape
to memory of F1-CNC
(With Request to send signal)
Switch to CNC-mode (memory mus t- be emptyY
-

insert taper tape

-

Start paper tape reader

1. Program G66
a a c. a a a
2. PressI.
On the display appears
A is the abbreviat.icn for ASCII r, American Standard Code for Information interchange(

oacooci
3. Pres clEETP
0
The display shows
J-0 . = LOAD
The program I transferred. At the end cf
CO
the tra:7:sfer the displa y snows, N
RS 232 Mode

• Transmission from paper tape to F1-CNC
(without Request to send signal)

-

Insert paper tape
Switch to CNC-mode

1. Program G66
O 0 0 0 0

2. Press INPI The display shows

A

3. PresstiNL The display shows I

A

4. Start paper tape

O 0 0 0 0 0

L 0

reader xtransmission

begins)

• Transmission from F1-CNC to paper tape
(with or without Request to send signal)
CNC-mode
-

,c;c6

:paper tape
Start caper tape puncher
Insert.

1. Program G66
000000
2 Press IINP . Display shows
j.

iA

3
splay shows rA

essJFWD.
(SA = SAVE:
The ',p aper tape is punched.

0

00
!
S A I

c c o
PROGRAM SHEET EMCO Fl CNC

Part Nr.

Part Name

Program Nr.

Name

Sheet Nr

Date

1 Li
I n

mm

E.

inch

Li
PROGRAM SHEET EMCO Fl CNC
Part Nr.

Program Nf.

Name

Sheet Nr.

Part Name

Date

rnm

C

inch

0
PROGRAM SHEET EMCO Fl CNC
PROGRAM SHEET EMCO Fl CNC
(M)

X
(J) (0)

(K) (s)

z

Fiemarhs

. 111
II
11
111
Ird
1111
IN
Melo
111111

111

Part Nr.

Program Nr.

Name

mm

Part Name

Pete

E

inch

q
PROGRAM SHEET EMCO Fl CNC
N

X
(M)

(D)

(K) (S)

Part Nr.

Part Name

Program Nr.

Name -

(L) (1)(H)

Sheet Nr.

Date

Remarks

mm
inch E.
Pemrograman cnc tu 3 a
Pemrograman cnc tu 3 a
Pemrograman cnc tu 3 a
Pemrograman cnc tu 3 a
Pemrograman cnc tu 3 a
Tool Data Sheet
T1

T2

T3 -

T4

T5

T6

T7

18

d
2

F
t
S
HZ
HzK I
d
D
F
t
S
HZ
HzK

(mm)
(mm)
(mm/min)
(mm)
(U/min) ..... ...
(mm)
(mm)

Cutter dia.
Cutter radius
Feed speed
Max milling depth
Spindle speed
Difference measure
Corrected difference measure

Zero-point of workpiece
Start position
Tool change position

Vertical axis system

-4-Y/)

+241

+Y

Ir
ille

Horizontal axis system

I1
,

Obb'
+X

V11110,

Zero•point offset (G92)
X

mm

Y

mm

Z

mm

Drawing no.:
Denomination:
Workpiece material:
Program no.
Name:
Dale:
Tool Data Sheet
T1

'

12

T3

T4

T5

I

T6 •

T7

18

d
F
t

S
HZ
HZK
Cutter dia.
(mm).
.
(mm)
Cutter radius
Feed speed
.... (mmimin)
F
Max. milling depth
. (mm).
t
S .. ....... .. ... (U/min) . ...... Spindle speed
. (mm)........ .... Difference measure
HZ
HzK ... ,...... (mm) .... .. ..... Corrected difference measure
d
0

Zero-point of workplace
Start position
Tool change position

Vertical axis system

Horizontal axis system

+Zei.

+Y
+X

„,...40
:4

VIINOINgis,

Zero-point offset (G92)
X

mm

Y

mm

Z

mm

Drawing no.:
Denomination:
Workplace material:
Program no.
Name:
Date:
Tool Data Sheet
Ti

d
D=

T2

13

T6

T5

T4

17

TB

*

F
t
S

HZ
HZK
Cutter dia.
(mm):

0

Cutter radius

F ......... ,,,,,,,,, (mm/min)

Feed speed

t•

Vertical axis system

+Z

Max. milling depth

5 .., ..... . .... .:

(mm) ,,,,,,,
(U/min)
(rnm)

Difference measure

Hzi

(mm).

Corrected difference measure

Horizontal axis system
-I-Y6

+Y

I

.0.‘
4

Spindle speed

Hz

-

VIIIIIIII.*
+X

Zero-point onset (G92)
•

Zero-point of workpiece
Start position
Tool change position

X

mm

Y

mm

Z

mm

Drawing no.:
Denomination:
Workplace material:
Program no
Name.
Date:

+X
L

r
-i

•

J=3
ET'

.L11-

6=1

---
•

1 .

I I
t1:1

•

_2;1

-1

••

•
-

•

r•

1713:t
--L3

•

More Related Content

PPT
CNC Machines
PPTX
manufacturing and desighn of cnc milling machine
PPT
Cnc technology
PPTX
Introduction to CNC machine and Hardware.
DOCX
CNC MILLING
DOCX
Yogendra singh final report (2)
PPTX
Turning software for cnc lathe machines
PPTX
Cnc machine
CNC Machines
manufacturing and desighn of cnc milling machine
Cnc technology
Introduction to CNC machine and Hardware.
CNC MILLING
Yogendra singh final report (2)
Turning software for cnc lathe machines
Cnc machine

What's hot (18)

PPT
introduction to cnc technology
PDF
Cnc 2 unit palanivendhan cnc elements
PPT
Cnc ppt by APC Sir
PPTX
Tool presetting
PPTX
Cnc axis and motion nomenclature
PPT
Cnc Milling
PPTX
Manufacturing Technology-II Unit 5
PPTX
cnc machining
PPT
PDF
Cnc lathe machine tool turret
PPT
9.pmat m 01
PPTX
Cnc machine centre
PPTX
Ncmachine (1)
PPT
Cnc technology yani punye
introduction to cnc technology
Cnc 2 unit palanivendhan cnc elements
Cnc ppt by APC Sir
Tool presetting
Cnc axis and motion nomenclature
Cnc Milling
Manufacturing Technology-II Unit 5
cnc machining
Cnc lathe machine tool turret
9.pmat m 01
Cnc machine centre
Ncmachine (1)
Cnc technology yani punye
Ad

Similar to Pemrograman cnc tu 3 a (20)

PPT
Ipec milling
PDF
Workshop Report.pdf
PDF
11 milling
PPTX
Milling machine.pptx
PPT
Milling Machine power point presentation
PPT
Milling Machine
PDF
Manufacturing systems milling operation.pdf
PDF
Mt 2 me8462- lab manual
PDF
MILLING PRESENTATION.pdf
PDF
pdfcoffee.com_milling-machine-pptppt-pdf-free.pdf
PPTX
Week 1 mill 1
PDF
machining and machine tool (Types of milling machine)
PPTX
Tool wear and tool Life
PPT
Milling machines typically have a rotating cutting tool mounted in a spindle....
PPT
non traditional machining
PPT
Milling & Gear Cutting
PPTX
lecture5 milling.ppt machining operation
PPTX
Final milling machine ppt..
PPT
Cutting conditions
PPTX
Manufacturing technology II unit - 3
Ipec milling
Workshop Report.pdf
11 milling
Milling machine.pptx
Milling Machine power point presentation
Milling Machine
Manufacturing systems milling operation.pdf
Mt 2 me8462- lab manual
MILLING PRESENTATION.pdf
pdfcoffee.com_milling-machine-pptppt-pdf-free.pdf
Week 1 mill 1
machining and machine tool (Types of milling machine)
Tool wear and tool Life
Milling machines typically have a rotating cutting tool mounted in a spindle....
non traditional machining
Milling & Gear Cutting
lecture5 milling.ppt machining operation
Final milling machine ppt..
Cutting conditions
Manufacturing technology II unit - 3
Ad

More from Alen Pepa (20)

PPT
Sumber daya alam
PPT
Rotax
PPT
Problem of seafarers in indonesia
PPT
Presentation3 partial differentials equation
PPT
Pp jadi
PPT
Perpindahan panas bu lidia
PPT
Pengantar manajemen bisnis
PPT
Modul manajemen-stratejik-bab-12-mei-2010
PPT
Mgg 3 morfologi phn
PPT
Metode surveylalu lintas
PPT
Metnum 2006
PPT
Met num3 persnonl-inier_baru
PPT
Met num1 pendahuluan-new
PPT
Met num s1
PPT
Met num s1 (2)
PPT
Mesin ketam dan mesin serut
PPT
Menggambar mrsin
PPT
Mekanisme
PPT
Material teknik 00
PPT
Materi+kewirausahaan
Sumber daya alam
Rotax
Problem of seafarers in indonesia
Presentation3 partial differentials equation
Pp jadi
Perpindahan panas bu lidia
Pengantar manajemen bisnis
Modul manajemen-stratejik-bab-12-mei-2010
Mgg 3 morfologi phn
Metode surveylalu lintas
Metnum 2006
Met num3 persnonl-inier_baru
Met num1 pendahuluan-new
Met num s1
Met num s1 (2)
Mesin ketam dan mesin serut
Menggambar mrsin
Mekanisme
Material teknik 00
Materi+kewirausahaan

Recently uploaded (20)

PPTX
UNIT-2(B) Organisavtional Appraisal.pptx
PDF
Physics class 12thstep down transformer project.pdf
PPTX
Lecture 3b C Library xnxjxjxjxkx_ ESP32.pptx
PDF
How Much does a Volvo EC290C NL EC290CNL Weight.pdf
PDF
Journal Meraj.pdfuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuu
PDF
Volvo EC20C Excavator Service maintenance schedules.pdf
PDF
Caterpillar CAT 312B L EXCAVATOR (2KW00001-UP) Operation and Maintenance Manu...
PPTX
capstoneoooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooo
PPT
Your score increases as you pick a category, fill out a long description and ...
PDF
Todays Technician Automotive Heating & Air Conditioning Classroom Manual and ...
PDF
Caterpillar Cat 315C Excavator (Prefix CJC) Service Repair Manual Instant Dow...
PDF
RPL-ASDC PPT PROGRAM NSDC GOVT SKILLS INDIA
PDF
computer system to create, modify, analyse or optimize an engineering design.
PDF
Caterpillar CAT 311B EXCAVATOR (8GR00001-UP) Operation and Maintenance Manual...
PPT
Kaizen for Beginners and how to implement Kaizen
PPTX
IMMUNITY TYPES PPT.pptx very good , sufficient
PPTX
TOEFL ITP Grammar_ Clausessssssssssssssssss.pptx
PPTX
Robot_ppt_YRG[1] [Read-Only]bestppt.pptx
PDF
EC300D LR EC300DLR - Volvo Service Repair Manual.pdf
PPTX
1. introduction-to-bvcjdhjdfffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffmicroprocessors...
UNIT-2(B) Organisavtional Appraisal.pptx
Physics class 12thstep down transformer project.pdf
Lecture 3b C Library xnxjxjxjxkx_ ESP32.pptx
How Much does a Volvo EC290C NL EC290CNL Weight.pdf
Journal Meraj.pdfuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuu
Volvo EC20C Excavator Service maintenance schedules.pdf
Caterpillar CAT 312B L EXCAVATOR (2KW00001-UP) Operation and Maintenance Manu...
capstoneoooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooo
Your score increases as you pick a category, fill out a long description and ...
Todays Technician Automotive Heating & Air Conditioning Classroom Manual and ...
Caterpillar Cat 315C Excavator (Prefix CJC) Service Repair Manual Instant Dow...
RPL-ASDC PPT PROGRAM NSDC GOVT SKILLS INDIA
computer system to create, modify, analyse or optimize an engineering design.
Caterpillar CAT 311B EXCAVATOR (8GR00001-UP) Operation and Maintenance Manual...
Kaizen for Beginners and how to implement Kaizen
IMMUNITY TYPES PPT.pptx very good , sufficient
TOEFL ITP Grammar_ Clausessssssssssssssssss.pptx
Robot_ppt_YRG[1] [Read-Only]bestppt.pptx
EC300D LR EC300DLR - Volvo Service Repair Manual.pdf
1. introduction-to-bvcjdhjdfffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffmicroprocessors...

Pemrograman cnc tu 3 a

  • 1. EMCO F1-CNC Basic Preface The use of CNC-machines will still increase in the future. Not only in industrial production also in small workshops conventional machines will be replaced by CNC-machines. The application of CNC-technics is not bound to the classic machine tools such as lathes, milling machines or to the metalworking area. One could say, nearly every day a new application of CNC technics is realized. Practically all occupations such as technical designer, technical manager or salesman, skilled worker, methods engineer, controller, etc. will be confronted with CNC-technology in many ways. CNC basic knowledge is important for everyone of them. How spezialized this knowledge must be, will depend on the specific occupation. EMCO MAIER & CO. is also producer of CNC production machines and since a long time experienced and active in technical education worldwide. After producing the EMCO COMPACT 5 CNC which is used worldwide successfully for years, the EMCO Fl-CNC has been developed. As the method and the concept of the EMCO COMPACT 5 CNC has been very successful, we designed the F1-CNC also that way: the student should work on the machine from the very first hour.
  • 2. Marialin for t ools Many contents which ale difficult to explain and often net understood when taught theoretically, can only be explained by working on the CNC.machine. Operating a CNC machine, milling with ditterenl cut ete. can only be learned by practical working. Chip guard CNC milling machismo are built in different types: Horizontal-, vertical, portal milling machines, inachi lung centers, etc Therefore we designed the machine so that CNC. milling . covering all types can be pc( termed Consider machin• and teaching material as a The book BASIS is developed for the student. For the tea. cher an additional handbook and Overhead slides are available. Use this handbook in addition to the bock BASIS if you want to do it in a self teaching course. Switch tti change axis system h-OriioniTairvertical ChuCtl change loonslem MilitioHead IQ/ tye
  • 3. • Ali rignts reserved especially those of diffusion and duplication through film, radio, television. photomechanical reproduction. sound tracks of any and every kind, translation into foreign languages, reprints Of, extracts from the text. 0': 1984 by EMCO MAIER & CO. Fabrik fUr Speziaimaschinen, FriedmanmMaier-Stralie 9, A-5400 HaHein, Austria. Printed in Austria,
  • 4. 1. General — Technological data — Finding the Chip Removal Values, Speeds — Mounting the Tools -- Chucking the Workpieces
  • 5. Technological data 3. Feed Rate and Depth of Cut 1. Cutting speed (Vs) Vs (m/min) d (mm) x lr x S ( rpm) 1000 F = Feed rate (mm/min) t = Depth of cut (mm) Vs = Cutting speed Generally: feed rate and cutting speed depend on- d = Diameter of workpiece S = Main spindle speed The maximum cutting speed - Material depends - workpiece material - performance of machine and - geometry of milling cutter. on of workpiece: higher the resistance of the material, the lower the cutting speed. The charts contain the following data: V s = 44 m/min for aluminium (Torradur Vs = 35 B) m/min for soft steel soft plastics V s = 25 m,/min for tool steel hard plastics - Material of tool: Carbide tools allow higher cutting speed than HSS tools. values given in the charts are for HSS tools. 2. Spindle speed (S) tile speed of the milling spindle from cutting speed and diameter of milling cutter. S (rpm) = Vs (rnimin) x 1000 d (mm) x Material of workpiece The higher the material resistance the larger the feed and the depth of cut (limitation by milling cutter geometry). The charts contain orientation values for the F1-CNC. Connection F t The larger "t" the smaller "F" and vice versa.
  • 6. Procedure The technological data are written into the tool specification sheet. Finding the feed rate and the depth of cut: Material: aln inium 71) • . FecA1 tx: w, Me. i r".' Depth of cut (t = 10 mm) i j IF = 60 • • t") Dia. of milling (d=10 mm) I 1 L__ cutter mm/mil711 L___ You can also proceed in a different way: Feed rate F 200 '14 , 1 ,–H Dia, of milling cutter 10 mm) I I "'Depth of cut 4,2 mml LA( Finding the speed of rotations: Diameter of milling cutter vs S Correct cutting speed for the specific material Spindle speed The same procedure appiies for drilling. PS: Dcwncut milling -- Conventional Milling The specific knowledge is presupposed. however, with the Fl-CNC the differences may be neglected.
  • 7. Milling Depth of cut • Cutter diameter - Feed Drilling Diameter of drill bit • Feed mm 1 10 9 8 1,5 20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200 300 400 WO, mm/min
  • 8. Speed (of rotation) — Cutting speed — Feed 25 00 2000 c E 0 150 0 1000 900 800 700 600 500 400 300 200 Attention When plunging in with cutter, halve feed values of mill chart.
  • 9. Service and Maintenance of Machine Lubrication: Lubricate guideways of longitudinal, cross and vertical slide daily using oil gun (1 nipple on vertical slide, 2 nipples left side underneath longitudinal slide). Pressure resistant, corrosion-protective oil with slip-stick reducing characteristics. 73 mm/sec (cSt) reference temperature 40° C. E.g. CASTROL MAGNA BD 68 This corresponds to the CINCINNATI Specification P47. Spindle taper for tool mounting Interior taper of main spindle and tool taper have to be free of grease and dust (force locking)1 Safety measures Pay attention to the general and specific milling safety rules. The knowledge about them is pre-supposed. Raw material If you • use aluminium, take only machinable. aluminium. Advisable material: Torradur 3, Al, Cu, Mg, Pa F38, material no. 3,1645,51 according to DIN 1725/1747 or similar. Tools Use high quality and well sharpened tools only.
  • 10. Clamping of Tools Attention: Spindle taper and tool taper must be dirtand dust-free. Clamping with collet chuck Tools with cylindrical shaft are clamped with the collet chuck. Note: Put collet into nut inclined so that the eccentric ring grips the groove of the collet. Screw nut with collet onto collet chuck. Taking out the collet: Unscrew nut. The eccentric ring in the nut presses the collet out when unscrewing. Maintenance Use oil and clean collet and collet chuck after use. Chips and dirt can damage the tapers and influence the precision. Collets Clamping of tools Put tool into collet and tighten aut with cylindrical pin in clockwise direction. For counter-holding of main spindle put cylindrical pin into collet holder. 1A You find the clamping capacity in inch • and metric engraved on the collets. Diameters smaller or larger than indicated must not be clatped.
  • 11. Clamping with shell end mill arbor Using the arbor you can clamp tools up to a bore of 16 mm. The 4 spacing collars serve for adjusting the different width of the milling cutters. 02m:ffiti
  • 12. Clamping Possibilities for Workpieces Clamping bars The clamping bars are mounted directly onto the slide depending on the relative workpiece. Machine vice with stop Width of jaw: 60 mm Clamping capacity. 60 mm Stepped clamping shoe Height: 60 mm For clapping a workpiece need at least two clamping shoes. 1.8
  • 13. 3-jaw chuck (2x 3 Jaws) 4jaw chuck (2 x 4 jaws) 4-jaw independed chuck For holding of round, triangular and hexagonal workpieces centrically. For holding of round, square and octogonal workpieces centrically. For holding of workpieces centrically and eccentrically. Adaptor plate To mount 3-jaw, 4-jaw chuck and independent. The adaptor plate itself is mounted on to the milling table. Intermediate plate Ti mount 3-jaw, 4-jaw cnuck and independent. The 'intermediate plate itself is mounted on to the dividing atachment. The dividing attachment is clamped to the millinq table with two T-nut screws. Dividing attachment
  • 14. The Dividing Attachment Operating tips TECHNICAL DATA Diameter of rotary table; 150 mm Worm reduction: 1:40 T-slots according to factory standard Number of holes in dividing plates: 27,33,34,36,38,39,40,42 OPERATING ELEMENTS Clamping levers for rotary table (1): Clamping levers are Loosened during the dividing operation itself, but must be clamped before every machining operation Indexing pin with handle (2): During direct dividing from 15° to 15°. the pin rests into the parameter notoiles of the rotary table. During indirect dividing (worm dividing) or free dividing by means of the graduated scale, the Indexing pin must be pulled out and swivelled to the left. The graduated scale (3) is for controlling the divisions. 2 4 Crank handle with index plunSer (4) moves the worm which is engaged with the wormwheel of the rotary table during indirect dividing. The shears serve to facilitate adding the number of holes when a fraction of a turn is to be added. Disengaging and engaging the worm: T-slots of the dividing attachment The alien head screw (5) is loosened. When the dividing plate is turned counterclockwise, the worm and wormwheel are disengaged. The rotary table can be turned by hand for direct indexing. Sy turning the dividing plate clockwise, worm and wormwheel are engaged. To facilitate engagement of worm and wormwheel, the rotary table should be moved slightly by hand. The alien head screw (5) must again be retightened.
  • 15. Types of Dividing Indirect dividing: Direct dividing: Indirect dividing offers many more dividing possibilities and is more accurate because of the worm reduction of 1:40. Indirect dividing method: If the crank handle is turned 40 times, the rotary table makes 1 revolution (360°). With help of the dividing plates, exact fractions of turns can be executed. Worm and wormwheel are disengaged. Possibility 1: Dividing by means of the indexing pin. Dividing possibility from 15° to 15° (i.e., maximum of 24 divisions within 360°). Possibility 2: The dividing can be done freely with the aid of the graduated scale on the rotary table. Note With indirect dividing the indexing pin is always disengaged. For manufacturing a workpiece the rotary table has to be fixed. The indexing chart: 1st column: indicates number of divisions per 3600 2nd column: shows the corresponding angle of the division 3rd column: shows the number of 360 0 crank handle revolutions which are necessary 4th column: shows the number of holes to be added for each index plate
  • 16. Example of an indirect dividing operation: Desired division: 13 divisions in 360° From the indexing table it can be seen that at the desired division 13, 3 full crank turns must be made plus a fraction. turn of 3 additions) holes on the indexing plate 39. 4. Execution of the dividing operation: 3 full turns plus the fractional turn of the 3 added holes are made; that means that the plunger is placed in the black hole. One dividing operation is completed. Practical execution: 1. The indexing plate with 39 holes is mounted. 5. Next dividing operation: The shears are turned until the left arm touches the pin again; the next dividing operation follows as described in 4. above. 2, in the indexing table one sees that at the division 13, 3 full turns plus 3 holes on the 39 plate have to be added.. Therefore, the shears are fixed so that they include 4 holes. NOTE: The shears may not be moved during the dividing operation, otherwise they do not serve their purpose as an orientation aid. 3. The indexing plunger is placed in a hole of the 39 plate (marked black on the drawing) and the left shear arm moved until it touches the pin of the plunger. NOTE: If a larger number or holes has to be reached than the maximum opening of the shears allow, you have to set the difference of boles between the shears. Example 21 divisions per 360 0 have to be carried through. From the chart one can see that one full turn p lus the fractional turn, of 38 holes on the disc 42 have to be carried through. 38 holes cannot he set. Thus: 42-38=4 holes. When dividing you make one additional turn (2 turn ailtogether) and turn back the difference of 4 holes (the shears comprise 5 holes). 4 4 el
  • 17. Formula for the Calculation of the Hole Numbers Required z No. of divisions required for one revolution of the workpiece. INDEX TABLE K No. of revolutions of handle for a complete revolution for of the workpiece. MAXIMAT n No. of revolutions of handle for one dividing move: n = Worm reduction of dividing head 1:40; i. e. K = 40. , to. ■ ! I Amount of holes to be added Amount of notes to be added 7. I •Zr1 1 [ ..... as . w ; 114e o . for each index plate for each index plate 0 : , 1 '2.-cr = c, c ' o 1 ,3 0 0 ,z, ,444 - o , , th' :• o, 1 °. 6" .1 "' 71 1 8, i c •2'6: 27! 33 34i 36 38 39 40 42 -a7-' 1 E 1 2.`?:. 27 33 34 36 38 39 40 , 42 4 2 h 18020 10 9 32 1 1 1 201 ! 1 1 ; 7 : 175 1 . 191 121 33 i 1 1I 170°.,18 1. 24 1'4 34 1 1 .-,-. -L-, [ i .; 1 1 j 160'7117! 21 : 35J 6 .. 1 4 150-1 16 18 36 ; 100/. 1 -4 1 140.": 15: 15 . 2 I 38 ' 11 -r--- I 12 i --1-:i ' 130':' 14! 1 39 : ! 125'' 13 1 24 ! 40: 9`-' . 110111111111.11111 3 12013" 9 11; ---, 12 40 13 14 1 42 ' III 4 110°--r-- ---1. , '.12 6 . III 30 44 i --I r 100°! 11 3 [[ 24 45 8 c: 32 i 4._. 4' 90'' 1[ 1 0-ir ! 35 t ' 48 : 30 ____. 50: : 80 -- 24 8. ! ' 32 f -4-76'r : 8 9' 11 L12 ' 14 13 7'• , 21 ' 28 . 5 ' 72'781 30 • 52 i d 70"' 7 ' 21 . i 1 54 i 1... 20 . ! 65 Q71 6 1 -1--, 551 H. 2 1 . i, 60°–'- 6:it 18 '1 22, , 26 30 56 ' . 28 55 63 : '1 18 60 6° ---5 1' 1 7 30 64 ' 25 , :. .t : 65 '. 24 :50 5 15 :• f , I 8 1--- 45'-' 51 i 1 1 I 1 20 I 66'. i.- I--} • 40', 414 12 1 1 16 : 68 4.: 410 • 36 ,': 4 :1 ! • 7 70 • 24 t---f 11 3: 21 ' ' 1 72 ; 5° .__ 15 20 • 12 : 30': 3, 9 1 11 ' 12 ; 14 13! 76: 20 ! , 131 1 1 1 :31 3' 20 781 4---i-,. -T4 1,I 36 I 2 r 1[ 1 , 17 18 19 • . : 80 20 4i 25-' 1 22 84 84 • -r—15 ; 24'1 '; 2!18 :. 22 : 424 , t 28 . 26 1i— 85 ' ' 16 t 2 IT17 ; 18 ' 19 ----Idt ! 20 21 88 15 ! 17 • 4.' 2 r ;• : 12 1 : 12 1 90 4" 1: 4_ I-1-18 [I 20'-' [ 2 1 6 .• ! . 8 ! 95 16 =111 1 t -1r-19 ' • 1 4 ;2 96 15 4.! 11. '.t 20 ' 1-EV.• ' 2 • ' 100 I MOEN '16 • 1 I• 21T .1!_ I.! 9 11 1 13 MIMI 12 3j —1_ .4-, f-• 1802r 421 : ! .I , i : L .38 1 6 ! 8 , Mil . -22 , ' 1 •. t- 27: : 200 ' : 8 + + _ -4-24 ' 16'-' + 11 18 1: 22 i[ 240 !•--k•6 24 ' 28 i 26 1 : Ell l---25Hr —,-+ ef .{-i, -4.• __i__.. 1,i - -- i 270. i --L :-i .' 4 • 24 t 3601°11 26 F1 1 3! 1 1--4- ': [ 21 ' ---t- i. -1-1 i 40' ; 2 1 ' 13 i MEIN , 28 30 18 iL I 2 WIMINININ1 . ' 27 4-- 1- 131 1' 20' ' ! 30 1- 1 ' 9 11 2-712 ' 14 13 10111111111.11 i: 1 Q)1 1 – .1 / --. , 1 ! ' L -1--- 1 I- -I- 1 24 1 f is : 1 i• • ■-• i i H- .1 ,• — 1 120 1 ! I : • • 1 ' • 4-- .
  • 18. Chapter 2: Handoperation — Operating element (survey) — Positioning of milling cutter — Traverse indication — Input of X, Y, Z values Switching feed motors "Curventless" 2.2 2.4 2.7 2.8 2.11
  • 19. Traverse — Hand Operation Monitor Display After switching on the machine, the figure 0 appears. Lamps X,Y or Z are on. N X,Y,Z when G XYZ F © D,‘.1 K M If you traverse in tX, the lamp X lights up. When you take your finger from the key, the traverse distance is shown in 1/100 mm on the VDU. With a distance of 2,45 the display indicates 245. N The screen snows zero for you switch it cn. With the exception of rapid traverse the indication is shown continuously in steps of 0,5 mm. G XYZ F ggcoo.9)00 D,J IC M 245 If you press the Z--key, the light jumps to the Z-lamp. After you lift your finger from the key , the traverse distance appears (with 6,28 mm 628 will appear) N g0 Doi K G XYZ F 0 © (o o 6) 628 Minus sign on display N G XYZ F (000) © 0 D,J K LT M 628 XY -30 -340 250
  • 20. Input of X, Y, Z Zero-Values from any chosen Milling Position The display shou.,,d indicate zero, in case the milling cutter stands at a given point (X=0, Y=0, Z=0). You can program the X,X,Z displays tc indicate zero. The milling cutter is at a distance of 22,1.5 mm to the workpiece edge in X. The display indicates whatever value. In case the milling cutter traverses in +X direction by 22,15 mm, then the display should indicate the value X=0. N G XYZ F © (I) 0 0) © 0 T D,J K Procedure: 1. The lamp X on the display lights up 2. Press INP - the lamp X flashes N2 EE INP 2215 INP 3. Put in the value (no plus/ minus sign, because the milling cut-. ter should. indicate with plus "traverse direction 0"). 4. Press key INP. The flashing of toe X--lamp stops. You can enter the Y,Z values in the . same way. When programming minus-values first put in the figures, then press key minus, 2R
  • 21. Application of Path Programming in Hand Operation Mode Zero point for the dimensionirg is the workpiece edge. The milling cutter shall move to this point. The displays shall be set zero, Procedure: 1. Scratch surface, set Z-display zero, 2. Scratch surface in X-direction. Put in value of milling cutter radius r. 3, Scratch surface in Y-direction. Put in value of milling cutter radius r. Note: You can traverse after scratching as you iike. If you program the zero-point, you have to add to the X,X displa y the radius value and put it in.. Exercise: i. Program the display X,Y,Z=0 if the milling cutter is positioned onto the edge, Move the milling cutter to the indicated. position.
  • 22. Switching Feed Motors "Currentless" When switching on the machine the feed motors are currentless. If you.have - in hand- or CNC-operation mode - moved the slides the feed motors stay under power. N 1.0.0 50 r r /(1,C Switching currentless - with no program being stored G XYZ F O 0 CUD 0 0 K LT M 641 0 300 AOC INP H/C DEL M REV FWD tip START 1. Switch to CNC-operation mode: Press H /C key. I 2. Press key 3. Key VDU. inE . The light jumps to G. . The rownher appears 4. Press keyilNPI. Now the feed are switched currentless. on the motors Switching currentless - with a program being stored N G64 is a pure switching function. It is G XYZ F O 000 D.J K LT M 64 not stored. 0 H/C ti4 START 1, Press on. key so that G light gets 2. When a number appears on the VDU, press DEL 3. Key in 4. Press EE keyra?. Now the feed motors are switched currentless.
  • 23. Operating Elements Control Elements Hand Operation NUMERICALLY" CONTROLLED-:.- 1. Main switch 3. Emergency stop button Turn key to the right. Machine and control part are under power (except emergency stop button is pressed). Control unit, feed motors and main motor are cut off from power by pressing emergency stop button: turn button to the left - it will jump back to orginal position. Main switch has to be switched on again. 2. Control lamp main switch When main switch is on, lamp is on. '11
  • 24. 4. Switch for main .spindle 12. Control lamp for hand Turn switch to the right. 13.JH /CLswitch key: operation 5. Turning knob for speed control of main spindle 6. Ammeter Shows power consumption of main spindle motor. In order to protect motor against overload, the power consumption should not surpass 2 A with 220-240 V or 4 A with 100-110 V. 7. Feed keys for longitudinal, cross and vertical slide 8. Rapid traverse key If keys for feed and rapid traverse are pressed together, then the relative slide will move with rapid traverse. speed. 9. Turning knob for setting the feed rate 10. Inch/metric switch and switch for changing the axis system 11. Digital read-out for slide movement i X, t Y, ± Z are shown in 1/100 mm or 1/1000 inch. Plus movement without sign Minus movement by a light beam 125 X -1,25 mm or -0.125 inch operation hand operation/CNC If you press the(H/Clkey the light of the control lam p hand operation will jump to CNC operation (operation mode: CNC). Bypressing the key once again the . light will jump back (operation mode: nand operation). 14. DEL key The X,Y,Z values are set to zero. 15. Thel-4. key lkey ycu can switch from With thei X to Y to Z without movement of slides. 16. The INP key With the INPI key you enter the values for slide movements. 17. M-key Activates switching exits.
  • 25. • Hand Operation F1-CNC Positioning of the Milling Cutter 1. Scratching front sides and top side With milling most measuremen-zs refer :)uter edges. In order to use the measurements of the technical drawing you have tc, "zero-set" the display and use as reference/starting point the outer edges. Example Milling cutter with dia. to mm. Move milling cutter in Z-direction until you scratch surface slightly. Set. Z-display to zero (press key DEL), Scratch front side in X-direction.. - Set X-display to zero (press key DEL) X Y 0 - Scratch. front side in Y-direction. Set Y-display to zero (press key DEL)
  • 26. Zerasetting of Display to Zero Point of Dimensioning (Example: Milling) Example: Milling of groove - The groove is milled using a 3 mm cutter. - Zero point for the dimensioning is the workpiece edge and surface. - The. measures refer to the center of the milling cutter. X=0/ Y=0 Consequence Move axis of milling cutter to edge of workpiece. a) Scratching of all 3 surfaces and zero-setting of X,Y,Z. N G XYZ F ©CD(530)(DO T M D,J K 4001 DEL • G XYZ F (DO CD D,J K T M 0 b) Move by value of milling cutter radius into X-direction. Set X to "zero".
  • 27. c) Move mill, cutting by value of milling cutter radius into Y-direction. Set display to "zero", N G XYZ F ©(p01;) © D,J K TM 400 • DEL NO XYZ F D K TM Exercise Move milling cutter such that all dlsplay values are at "zero". Exercise Mill a recess as in drawing. Enter the following values: Spindle sped S (rpm) Feed mm/min Infeed in X (mm) Infeed. in Z (mm) ! Pay attention to set correct feed. A 1
  • 28. Chapter 3 CNC-Operation Survey — Operating and control elements — Preparatory functions, miscellaneous-/Switching functions Artarm signs — Possible inputs — Operation CNC Operation magnetic tape 3,2 - 3.3 3.4 - 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.9 0 ra
  • 29. uNu-uperauon tQurvey) Operating Elements Control Elements CNC-Operation 1. Main switch with removable 'Key, Memory is being cleared when switching off, 2. Control lamp shows the power supply • of machine and control unit. Emergency stop button with interlock. Unlocking of button: turn button to the left. To switch on machine, turn main switch to zero and. to 1 again. When switching off also memory will be cleared. 4. Optional switch .for axis system and for metric or inch mode of operation.
  • 30. CNC-Operation (Survey) 5. Switch for main spindle 11. Keys for program input, correction, storing of program on tape, V24 operation etc. (see detailed explanations) Position 1 (main spindle ON, without M03) Position CNC: main spindle is switched on by programming M03 and switched off by M05, M06 (with F*0) and M30. 6. Ammeter 7. Magnetic tape switch key Manual/CNC operation 9. Control lamp CNC operation 10.1-HAW-IT-key The program is being worked off 11.1. Number keys 0 -1791 I1.2..7 The minus sign key -7 To enter minus values the minus sign E] has to be pressed after input of numbers. 11.3. INP1 key (INPUT = storing) Storing key 12. VDU (display)7 Indicates values for address letters and modes of operation 11.4.1DEL1 key (DELETE = erase) Erasing key 13. Control lamp address letters 11.5.1FWD1 key (FORWARD) Program jumps forward block by block 14. Control of milling spindle speed 11 .6 . key (REVERSE) Program jumps backwards block by block 11.7. H.] Arrow•key Display jumps word by word 11.8, ld key: key for entering of miscellaneous functions.
  • 31. CNC-Operation (Survey) Survey Preparatory Functions, G-Codes G 00 Rapid traverse 047 Add tool radius twice V: N3/G00/X±5/Y±4/Z±5 10/G47 H: N3/G00/X14P1±5/Zi5. G 01 Linear interpolation G48 Subtract tool radius twice V N3/COI/X±5/Y-174/Z±5/F3 N3/G4S H: W3/G0i/X-1-4/Y:S/Zi-5/F3 G 02 Circular interpolation clockwise GO-3 Circular interpolation counterclockwise Quadrants: m.3iG02/ Y: X--',/Y-14/Z±5iF3 GO.' G64 Feed motors without current. (switching function) G65 Magnetic tape operation (switching function) N3/M)9/J2/K2 (Partial circles) 1■13/G65 004 Dwell N3/G04 0 66 Activating RS 232 Interface 115/G6;:: G21 Empty block. N3/G21 •072 Pocket milling cycle V: N3/GT2/Xf5/Y14/Z:F3 025 ' Sub-routine program call • 143/G25/1_,;17 ) 3 H: N3/G72/X1t41YI5 74 Thread-cutting G27 Jump instruction N3/G74/10/Z/F3 143/G27/L (F) (;414) Tool radius compensation cancelled N3/G40 G45 Add tool radius NJ/G45. G46 Subtract tool radius NJ/G46 cycle (left-hand) 081 Fixed boring cycle N3/G61/Z15/F3 082 Fixed boring c y cle with dwell N3/G82/Z-3/F3 G83 Fixed boring cycle with chip removal N3/G83/2/F3
  • 32. CNC-Operation (Survey) G 84 Ggm Incremental value programming Thread-cutting cycle N3/091 N3/064/1(3/7,-5/F3 G85 92 Offset of reference Fixed reaming cycle V: N3/G92/X5/Y24/Zf5 N3/G85/Z-S/F3 H: N3/092/X14/Y1-5/Z-5 G89 Fixed reaming cycle with dwell N3/G89/Z15/F3 G90 Absolute value programming V = Vertical. H = Horizontal N3/090 Miscellaneous or Switching Functions MOO - Dwell N3/M00 M03 - Milling spindle ON, clockwise N3/M03 M05 - Milling spindle OFF N3/M05 M06 - Tool offset, milling cutter radius input N3/M06/D5/S4/Z± 5/T3 M17 - Return to main program N3/M17 M08 M09 M20 M21 M22 Switching exits N3/M2 M23 M26 - Switching exit - impulse N3/M26/H3 M.30 - Program end N3/M30 M99 - Parameters circular interpolation (in connection with G02/03) N3/M99/J3/K3
  • 33. Alarm Signs A00: Wrong G/M code A1: Wrong radius / M99 A2: Wrong Z-value A3: Wrong F-value A4: Wrong Z-value A5: M30 code missing A6: M03 code missing A7: No significance A8: Tape end with cassette operation SAVE A9: Program not found A101 Writing protection All: Loading mistake Al2: Checking mistake A13: Inch/ run switching with full program memory A14: Wrong mill head position/path in• /M or---H/M crement with LOAD A15: Wrong Y-value A16: Value of milling cutter radius missing A17: Wrong sub-routine A18: Path milling cutter compensation smaller zero 3.6
  • 34. CNC-Operation (Survey) Possible inputs (Otherwise alarm signs) Inch Metric Values Values Unit (mm) Unit (inch) 1/1000" Xv 0-19999 1/100 mm 0-7999 XR 0-9999 1/100 mm 0-3999 YV 0-9999 1/100 mm 0-3999 1/1000" YR 0-19999 1/100 mm 0-7999 1/1000" ZVH 0-19999 1/100 mm 0-7999 1/1000" Radii 0-9999 1/100 mm 0-3999 1/1000' D(X) milling cutter radius with MO6 0-9999 1/100 mm 0-3999 1/1000" F 2-499 mm/min 2-199 1/10"/min T(F) tool address M06 0-499 0-199 1 1 L(F) jump instructions 0-221 H(F) 0-999 exit signs M26 J/K circular parameter 0-90 Adresses N, G, X, Y, Z, F, D, J, K, L, M, T, S, H . 1/1000"
  • 35. CNC-Operation (Survey) Operation CNC LINPI Storing of word contents [DEL Deleting of word contents FWD.] Forward in program block by block GREVI Backward in program block by block HI1, 1 Forward in block word by word lM Input of M-functions Program hold: FWD] 1INP Program interruption LINP RE vj Delete program LDELi+ INP ] First DEL; then INPi Operation — Magnetic tape Storing of program on tape G65 Fiicril -- number — FWD I INPj Put in program r--7 LDELIremains pressed. Delete alarm REV! INP1 Insert block ry fi IINP Transmit program from tape to memory Select program G65INP number --b. iINP1 Delete tape contents G65 Delete block +DEId Single block mode T 3 etc. +1STARTI Testrun: 1M 1 +
  • 36. Chapter 4 CNC-Basics 4.1 CNC-lathe - The control CNC-machine - Main elements What happens in CNC-manufacture 4.2 - 4.3 4.4 - 4.7 Differences in manufacture using a handoperated or a CNC-machine This you are going to learn 4.8 - 4.9 4.11 What is programming The coding standards 4.13 - 4.15 4.17 - 4.19 4.21 - 4.23 Program structure 4.25 GOO/G01 Description of path lengths for slide movements 4.27 The CNC-program (structure) 4.29 The address words of the program sheet F1-CNC Standardization of axis systems for CNC-machines Concept of programming Methods of programming Dimensions of drawings The modes of programming G90/G91 4.31 - 4.33 4.35 - 4.41 4.43 4.45 4.47 4.49 4.51
  • 37. Determining the coordinates for programming in absolute mode 4.53 - 4.55d information to the control concerning 4.57 the workpiece zero-point Fixing the origin of the coordinates on the 4.59 F1-CNC (workpiece zero-point) Fixing the zero-point of coordinates with G92 - Programmed offset of 4.61 - 4.69 reference point Various workpiece zero-points 4.71 - 4.73 in one program 4.75 - 4.77 Mixed programming Connection: G92 - Zero-point offset/ M06 - Tool lengths compensation 4.79 4.81 - 4.83 Some tips for procedure 4.85 4.87 The M-functions 4.89 Description of block formats Types of controls of CNC machine tools 4.91 - 4.97 4,99 - 4.143 Programming - Geometry
  • 38. CNC-Lathe The Control What ist a CNC-lathe? - A machine which we feed with figures and letters = DATA INPUT - A. machine which "understands" the data which processes it and calculates. = DATA PROCESSING - A machine which passes on this calculated data in form of instructions, = EXECUTION - A machine which follows the instruction Meanings in daily use Tne meanings change quite often in their daily use. NC-machines were originally machines with numerical control, but no microprocessor. Today such machines are obsolete. The program was read in directly from the perforated tape. Today NC-machines comprise all types CNC, ANC or AC types.
  • 39. CNC-machine - Main elements CNC — Machine — Main Elements — A "humanized" Comparsion Data Input: Via keys or magnetic tape interface element can be compared to a secretary Output element: Lets call him press speaker. Central Processing Unit Microprocessor. Let's call it the director. He delegates, takes decision, calculates. A watch gives him the feeling for time, but he does not have any specialist knowledge. Operating program (EPROM).. Memory HAM Remembers the program specialists. They know everything. Output element (Interface): Chief operator He receives orders and passes them on. Amplifier (foreman)
  • 40. CNC-machine — Main elements CNC-Machine — Main Elements Digital read-out Data Input Central processing unit = Microprocessor (Director) Output e ement (press speaker) Operating program = EPROMS (Specialists) Output element Interface (Chief operator) Amplifier (foreman)
  • 41. What happens in CNC-Manufacture 3. specialist ---4■Director: ,Data input "Yes, o.k." I Data processing / Data storing] 4. Director ----opMempry: "Please give me the data!" 5. Memory Data outputj –lb-Director: X,Y slides have to be moved in ratio 1 : 4. In the computer nothing happens without the director. There is a strict hierarchy. What happens 1. Secretary if you press the key START? 6. Director calculates and gives data to chief operator. With the aid of the watch he also determines the operating speed (when threading he waits for the main spindle position). 1.Director: "They pressed START!" Director asks memory: "Did they put in program end M30?" 7. Chief op erator ----III-Foreman: Move X slide with feed size F1 and Y slide with feed size F2. If yes, the program can start. 2. Director ----ipSpecialists: We want to machine a groove in a certain angle. 4.4 8. Director ----Ili-Press speaker: "The block is finished. We work on the next. Let them know!"
  • 42. What happens in CNC-manufacture? What happens in CNC-Manufacture? Digital read-out Data Input VI El a fll MI Central processing unit = Microprocessor (Director) Output element (press speaker) Interface element (secretary) 1111.: rneria 46.4r4k. er (r) -1;;;V ..00 :00" Operating program = EPROMS (Specialists) CNC-Machine Memory = RAM utput element
  • 43. What happens in CNC-Manufacture What happens in CNC-Manufacture What knowledge is necessary in order to manufacture, using a hand operated or a CNC lathe? Hand operated machine NC-machine
  • 44. CNC machine - handoperated machine Differences in Manufacture using a hand operated or a CNC-Machine (Survey) Hand operated machine Necessary information Technical. drawing Necessary means Lathe Chucking devices V Tools Necessary knowledge/Capabilities (to execute operation; Reading 3f technical drawings Knowledge abo..it tocl. geometry
  • 45. CNC machine - handoperated machine Differences in manufacture, using a hand operated or a CNC-machine - continued and operated machine NC-machine Technological information + Cutting speed depending on - material of workpiece - tool (HSS, carbide tipped) type of operation + Feed rate + Cutting depth * Performance and. dimensions of machine Execution Operator must know how to control the machine Writing the NC-program • 1-,_I . a . 1 . -1-- + -. I- ! • J. . - i • J.2: 4... --,-• _,__ ! j • .: Remarks F.---1.- — — -•- •• ____A --J. 1 E i • -. i-...---r - -• ±- • - ,.i___ 1 ., .._ .-It ■-.- -I- + Input of NC-program + Preparing the machine + Execution ! 1 .1
  • 46. This you are going to learn A rough survey Set up a CNC-program Enter all informations into program sheet. Rules how to write these datd have to be learned. Put in program You have to put in the information into the control. The control stores the information. You have to follow certain rules. V Give instruction to manufacture The control works with the information entered - it calculates and gives instructions to the machine tool. Check result Correct program Improve (optimize) program. 411
  • 47. Programming What is Programming? Prog ramming means to feed the computer with such data which it understands. In other words, we have to "spoon-feed' the computer, List the data in orderly sequence and in a Language which is fami;_iar to the computer, which it understands, so that it can process the information. The operator does not understand the Chinese commands, because he does not speak this language. The CNC-machine does not understand the human language. We have to feed the CNC-machine with data in a language it will understand. This language is "encoded".
  • 48. Do you already know programming? It you have operated a machine tool you automatically carried out the right movements. Your brain gave instruction to your hands to operate the switches and :,evers in the correct sequence. This lob was automized to a large extent. When programming you have to wrice down all instructions. The instructions and informations must be - in a systematic sequence - complete - and accurate. They are given to the CNC-machine in a coded form. 4.15
  • 49. Coding The Coding Standards The program structure for numerically controlled machine tools: The program structure for numerically controlled machine tools: How to code informations and instructions is defined by standards. The standards are: - Program structure for numerically controlled machine tools. - According to DIN 66o25 (German Industrial Standards) - According to'ISO 1056 (International Standard), new edition ISO 6983. HOVE LONGITUDINAL SLIDE 410mIn TO THE LEFT 200nint/min 111111111111•0 411111111.1116 N.— /601 /x+40 F2011 The coding rules must be learned by you so that you can write the program for the manufacture.
  • 50. Coding The Coding of informations and Instructions (Criteria) One cculd build a computer . which coderstands instructlons Ln normal. language. This would bring about qu to some disadvantaces: Language information :Criteria Move the longitudinal slide - main spindle being switched on - with a civen feed a distance of 25 mm at an angle 1 It would be necessary to build -a computer for each language (or even for each sLang) The long instructions are complicated and vague. :3 The language is practice oriented. This should also be true for CNC-instructions. 4 The code should be applicable to many different machine types. • Demands for -toding - Language neutral Simple coding Clear expression - Practice-oriented - Universally applicable When setting up standards for the program structure of CNC-machines the aim of the many experts was to create codes for instruction which should be - as short as possible simple language neutral practice-oriented applicable to all machines.
  • 51. Program structure Program Structure Coding of the movements Introduction of the Carthesian Coordinates System. Write down the instruction which you would have to give for milling. The milling spindle is on. Number the instructions consecutively. VERTICAL SLIDE CROSS SLIDE
  • 52. Coding of slide movements The Instructions , Move the vertical slide downwards The movements are described using the axis denomination of the Carthesian Coordinates System. (15 mm ) For vertical mills Move the longitudinal slide to the left '50 mm) X-movement: longitudinal slide Y-movement: cross slide Z-movement: vertically :3 Move the cross slide forward (30 mm) are neither short nor language-neutral nor simple. Instruction on direction is achieved using ± sign. Coded instructions -Z 2 3 15 mm 50 mm -Y 30 mm 4.23
  • 53. GOO/G01 The movement 1 is different to movements 2 and 3, Movements 2 and 3 Movement 1 StraLght movement and chit removal No chip removal Feed rate has to be set (depending on cutter dia., raw material, depth of cut etc.). Speed as large as possible. Coding: Coding Rapid traverse = GOO Linear interpolation = GO1 N X II _ . (J) ;0) (K) Y {S) .. _ '" 0 • . . • 00 0 5a0 • 3000 1 0
  • 54. r01611 1.1011V1111.0 Description of Path Lengths for Slide Movements Also in this case simple arrangements are made. The statement 'mm' meter) is left out. Only the number is written. X -45,325 means: traverse -45,325 mm in X-direction. On the F1-CNC path lengths are pro• grammed without decimal point in 1/100 mm or 1/1000 inch. Thus, 23,25 mm is programmed 2325 and 1,253 inch is programmed 1253. Sign Measures without signs are automaticaJly "+" measures. The Program Sheet All informations and instructions are entered into the program sheet. Further explanations on the following page. N G (M) Y X (J) fp) (K) (S) a 00 F m OA) remarks 4 27
  • 55. External construction The CNC-Program (structure) The program is wrLtten down in the pro. gram manuscript. Y (K) (S) G (M) (J) 00 Do -3 0 2 03 04 • • • ► 2 00o OS ra z 0 X. (0) N C 0 r on - 2 Soo 0 F (L) (T) (H) 420 120 r oso 0 - 100 '168o 120 12o 2000 5So 1S-0o The program manuscript All essential data for the manufacture of a workpiece are filled in. The composition of this program is called programming. The structure of such a program is standardized. Parts of a program N (_, V X (MI ;.-I} oc ;.0 -3 000 01 0:. 2i Di 10 So (5 N1 (K) I • • F (L)(T) (H) o - 2 COO _0 42o o 68o 0 400 12 0 Y •.K. (S) T • 0 - X IJ) ISI C 0 03 ,_ Q') N ID) !DI 120 F (L) m 0- fP o P. 1_,_Qt 01 10S7 0 - 3 00 00 02 0 - 2 .5- oo 0 1 o 0 42o '0 1. The block The program consists of blocks. A block contains all data necessary to execute order: move longituan operation dinal sl.'_de straight or. 25 mm, speed 120 mm/min). 2. The words Each. block consists of various words. Each word consists of a letter and a combination of numbers, e.g. N01. 42D words 3. The word G 01 Address Combination of numbers A word consists of a letter and a combination of numbers. The letter is called address.
  • 56. The Address Words of the Program Sheet/Fl -CNC X G (M) N 1J) (0) III G CO ) N G (M) (J) N G (M) X (J) SD) ) (M) (J; N 1 . x (J) X X (K) Y IS) Y (D) (0) DI (K) (K) (K) Y Y F (1) IT) (H) Z (K) Y Z (5) (9) . (5) f (1.) (T) (14) Z F 6.14THFI) Z F (1-1 .r-) (H). Z F IL) (T) (H) 1. The N-address: N = abbreviation of number The instructions and informations are numbered. We talk about block number. On the Fl-CNC: N000 up to N221. 2. The G-address: Into this column we enter the key information, i.e. the 0-function or preparatory function. You will get to know the various G-functions in the course of our exercises. 3. The X,Y,Z-addresses: They are the columns for the path data. F1-CNC: The paths are programmed without.decimal point in 1/100 mm and/or 1/1000". 4. The F-address: F stands for "feed". For each chip removal movement the appropriate feed has to be programmed. F1-CNC: The feed is programmed in mm/min or 1/10 inch/min. 5. The M-address: M stands for "miscellaneous". M-functions are called "auxiliary functions". The M-values are entered into the 0-column. 4.31
  • 57. External construction N N N N N .G ( M) G (M) G (M) G (M) G (M) I..1) (J) X (D) (D) (K) (D) X (K) (K) X (J) X (D) (J) (J) X (D) (K) (K) IS) 'X Y Y Y (S) (S) (S) (S) Z Z Z z Z F (L) (T) (H) F (1) (T) (H) F I.) Cr) (H) F L) (T) (H) F L.) (T) (H) 6. The D-address: The cutter radius is described ander D. Radius 5 mm--4,-D 500 (compare M06 Tool compensation). 7. The S-address: S stands for speed. 2000 rpm---S 2000 (compare M06)- 3. The T-address: T stands ±or tool. Tool number 2--0-T02 cornpare tooi. lengths :7.ompensation). 9. The 0,K-addresses: 3,K are parameters for circle oroqramniF,g. These addresses are described in chapter G02/G0.3. 10. The L-address: is a jump address; compare G2.5, G27.
  • 58. MAIM al awcy Standardization of Axis Systems for CNC-Machines The axis systems are standardized for the various types of machinery according to ISO 841 and DIN 66217. The basis is the Carthesian Coordinates System (clockwise). The right-hand rule can be . of quite some help: it shows the position of the axes to one another. Making Programming Easier Mix-ups are quite common when programming X,Y,Z and the +/- directions. So even quite experienced programmers use auxiliary devices. Use the model_ of the coordinates system and you will commit less mistakes. IF)
  • 59. Axis systems Axis System Milling Machines Milling machines and machining centers are of different construction typologie. Example: Vertical mill type 1 Milling head with tool moves. The mounted workpiece carries out longitudinal and cross movements. 11111111"*'411111 Vertical mill type 2 Milling head with cutter is fixed. The mounted workpiece carries out lo • gitudinal; cross and vertical movements.
  • 60. Jr11,11.11.0 vsy /011•■■• • 1.0 Description of Cutter Path If you would have to directly describe the slide movements, it would need a continuous rethinking with the various different machine construction types. Example: Drilling a hole Type. 1: Move milling head downwards. Type 2: Move vertical slide upwards. A confusing situation. Thus, the important simple statement for CNC-machines! The path of the cutter is described. For the programming it is all the same, whether the slides or the tool move during manufacture. 4 39
  • 61. Axis systems Axis System Vertical Mills Axis system Horizontal mills Milling programs on vertical or horizontal mills are different. The Zaxis is always the main spindle axis. A minus Z-movement is always a feedin movement into the workpiece (e.g. drilling).
  • 62. Program sTruciure Concept of Programming - Methods of Programming Basically there are two methods to describe the path: absolute or incremertal_ The path infora:itiori is ,Iveh fr-:i a zero reference point.. Each point (place) is the reference point (place) for the following measurements. A Aq
  • 63. Dimensions of Drawings There are different types of dimensioning in technical drawings. Incremental dimensioning Absolute dimensioning Starting point for the dimensioning of the next point is always the actual. point which was described last. Zero-point for the dimensioning of ail points is a remaining fixed point. A O 1 LIO 15 Mixed dimensioning In most technical drawings you find both types of dimensioning. Some measures are given from one common point (absolute) or in the incremental mode (from the actual point described last). or) 15 63
  • 64. 144IJ*4J1 (Vii t ono vo Ile.oa. • Imam The Modes of Programming rt was the aim to achieve a very simple description of the traverse movements. You can program the points and traverse movements in two different modes - so to avoid changing of dimensions in the drawing. To instruct the computer how to calculate the values it is necessary to give a. key information. This is achieved by a G-instruction. G91 G90 - - Absolute mode description - Absolute mode programming (reference point programming) - Incremental mode programming N N X (M) (D) z Incremental mode description (M) X (J) (D) Y (S) z fi){T)(H) (L) (T) (H) - You describe point 1 starting from point 0. - You start from one point and describe all other points. - The zero-point of the coordinates system can be defined by you. — You describe point 2 starting from point 1. - You describe point 3 starting from point 2, etc. You have to imagine the coordinates system shifted into the relative point. 4.47
  • 65. G901G91 When do you have to give the G90/G91 information to the computer? The initial status of a CNC-machine ••■••••■■••■••■• When you switch on the main switch the machine is in mode of operation "hand operation" = initial status. N G X YZ F ooarroo D.J K L.7 M j 7 8 9{ 4 5 6.ra :INP 0 If you press the IVCIkey, the mode of operation is switched to 'CNC-operation". H/C M Ft-4 The "initial status" of the control is incremental. All traverse movements are calculated in incremental mode. G90 — Absolute value programming G91 — Incremental value programming G90 has to be programmed. You may program G9I, however it is not. necessary since the control calculates incrementally by itself. 111 (J) X ( 0 ) NY (S) 1111 MC; (H) N G (M) X (•4 (0) Y (K) (S) z F (L) (T) (H) Q34 111. NM= BB VIM erns 111 fa L 111 MO 1 I- G90 is a self-maintaining modal function. It is valid until it is revoked, i.e. until G91 is programmed. 4 trOKrewentat I P .Cloict-i-t2 11-- G91 is a self-maintaining modal function. G91 is revoked by G90.
  • 66. 411015414!ge, Exercise Exercise Exercise Describe points P1, P2, P3, P4, P5 as absolute data. Describe points PI, P2, P3, P4, P5 as incremental data. Write in block N000 the information for the mode of programming. N IM) X (.1) (0) (K) (S) z (1-)(T)( II X N (J1 (0) II Y ME (K) 15) Z F 0..)11 4.51
  • 67. Workpiece zero-point Determining the Coordinates for Programming in Absolute Mode Determining the Workpiece zero-point in the technical drawing In technical drawings the measures are often taken from one reference point. For programming it is convenient that as many measures as possible can be taken over from the drawing - without calculation work. You as programmer can determine the zero-point of the workpiece. The ideal choice can best be seen in the workpiece drawing. Symbol Short description
  • 68. wornpieue ici WWwit u - Where to set the workpiece zero-ooint is your own decision. - Pay attention to the signs of the axis. - Write axis signs and ± signs in t:_ne drawings not described. f 4 flflA a
  • 69. Workpiece zero-point The origin of the coordinates system'can be positioned in any point. Points may be positioned in any of the 8 squares. Describe the points in absolute and incremental mode. X - Y plane = Underneath side of workpiece Incremental Absolute N z (L) (t) (N)
  • 70. YV VI 1Wir Ur 14-1.0%,11 I R X - Y Plane in Center of Body incremental Absolute N 0 (M) (J) (D) (K) Y (S) (L) M (H) F M (H) 4 :qin
  • 71. Workpiece zero-point Informations to the Control concerning the Workpiece zero-point You. can instruct the control with G90/ -G91 how it should calculate the movements - in absolute or incremental mode. Absolute value programming Where is the origin of the coordinates system situated? The control unit of a CNC-machine can neither see nor think. - It does not know the position of the work.piece mounted to the slide. - It cannot read the technical drawing and thus cannot know the position of the workpiece zero-point chosen by you. CNC-solution: We have to instruct the control where we want the origin of coordinates.
  • 72. IrsorKpluutt zero-point Fixing the Origin of the Coordinates on the Fl -CNC (Workpiece zero-point) w Possibility 1: Fixing with G90 If the computer receives a G90 instruction in the course of the program, it considers the actual slides position as zero-point. In the left side mentioned situation you. could not take any workpiece measures from the drawing. You would have to calculate. This is only useful if you shift the origin of the coordinates system to the workpiece zero-point. Example: You move the cutter to the zero-point chosen by you. If the cutter is in this position you program G90. The origin of the coordinates is set. A
  • 73. G92 Fixing the Zero-point of Coordinates with G92 G92 - Programmed offset of reference point - We have set the workpiece zero-point, - The cutter position is known to you (distance workpiece zero-point to cutter). Information to computer with G92 You describe the cutter position looked at from the workpiece zero-point. In this way you fix the workpiece zeropoint selected by you. Attention: Format G92 N3/G921X ± 5/Y ± 4/Z ± 5 (vett kal) N3/G92/X ±4/X ± 5/Z + 5 (horizontal) - G92 is an information, no instruction to traverse, - G92 means automatically absolute value programming. - The zero-point of the workpiece can be set off with G92 within a program as often as wanted.
  • 74. Exercises Program the workpiece tero-point Program. the tool to the workpiece zeropoint. N N X G (M) G IN} I -•- 4- '1' (D) ti) (K) Z f X j"( ..,t1i -1-• (S) j i X i S) Z F 'Li 0":i (F11 F f t..) IT) (HI 4 I --.I-- 1 4.63
  • 75. G92 Exercises Program the worispiece zero-point Program the indicated traverse paths. G (M) N (J1 Y X (0) (K) 1S) 2 F. (L)(T)l-i i1 -1-- i_., . Be
  • 76. Exercises Program the worIcp iece zero-oint Program the :ndicated traverse paths. 4.67
  • 77. G92 Exercises Program the workpiece zero-point Program the indicated traverse paths. G (N) 1111111111 MN 11111111 0 111111.11 lill X (J) (D) Y (K) (S) Z F (L) I T ) (H) 11 MI 111
  • 78. Various Workpiece Zero-Points in one Program Wi : G92 / x -,2A0o 1 Wy : / 2. 1700 x -$700 / y -2600/ z 3500 y aQ Example: By a new programming of the workpiece zero-point the previous workpiece zeropoint is cancelled. - W1 Ls programmed. Plane 1 is worked on. - Traverse cutter to starting position, Sometimes it is easier for the programming to set various workpiece zeropoints within one program. - W2 is programmed. Plane 2 is worked on. Note: In mose cases it is best to program the reference point offset from one and the same point so that the program stays distinct. 4:71
  • 79. G92 Exercises Program the zero-points and the paths indicated.
  • 80. Mixed Programming You may change also within one and the same program the programming mode from absolute to incremental. and vice-versa. 0 4.75
  • 81. Mixed programming Programming of the originally fixed workpiece zero-point If you want to fix the originally programmed workpiece zero-point you have to either • move the tool into the original workpiece zero-point and then program G90 or • describe from the original workpiece zero-point the actual cutter position.
  • 82. WI 40 iftr! r ■•■ r Connection: G92 - Zero-point offset M06 - Tool lengths compensation M06 G92 The fa information is an incremental target information within an independent coordinates system. With G92 you fix the origin of the coordinates system. 4.79
  • 83. Example 4. Setting up the program: Carry out offsetting of workpiece 2 hzero-point Manufacture 1. Mounting the workpiece We assume that you have to manufacture a few workpieces of same shape. You mount the workpiece such that it is always in the same position on the ma chine table. - The machine vice is clamped. - In Y-- direction the workpiece remains always in same position because of the unmovable jaw. - In X-direction by a stop, - In 2-direction by identical spacers. 2. You scratch the three reference surfaces and move the tool to the program start point (= program end point, = tool change point).
  • 84. Some tips for procedure 1. Determining the workpiece zero-point in the drawing: You can see in your workpiece drawing what the best position for the work- piece zero-point will be. You determine the workpiece zero-point in your drawing. 2. Determining the starting point of the program. I . dke..- , I • ' ' ■gt.....:.or... Zii.r■•• I ....../ ., , ■ f I , 1 _* ;,T, L? a.i .. ' . . . 1. ( ! f'• ! . id I n I ) ' 1 11 d 4a = 7: 20 into a data sheet if more tools are go used. F t 0,} 44v0 Hz 0 t o 5 2a00 16 3. Measuring of tools - Putting in data 8 2000 430 1-320 HZK . 4.81
  • 85. M-Functions The Miscellaneous or Switching Functions M-Functions Switching operations are programmable too on CNC-machines. The M-address is used to program chem. The word for the miscellaneous functions contains a 2-digit key number. Extract from codes for miscellaneous functions (DIN 66025, part 2) 1-Miscell i Haneous • ! Miscell aneous Meaning Function M04 M10 Programmed stop 1 MO2 MO3 Meaning Function MOO MO1 I 1 Mu , r M1 Optional (planned) stop End of program 1 Spindle clockwise Spindle counterclockwise ! Clamp -1 1 Unclamp . : M30 End of program Oriented spindle stop I Interlock bypas s M3 M31 MO5 Spindle off M48 MO6 Tool change M49 MO7 ! Coolant, no. 2 ON msa Constant speed oh I MOB Coolant no, 1 ON M59 Constant. speed off Coolant off M60 MO9 I Workpiece change All key numbers not mentioned are temporarily or permanently available. The manufacturer of the control can assign the key numbers to a given function. --1
  • 86. M-Functions Miscellaneous or Switching Functions on the F1-CNC INN X (J D) EMI SIM V (K,S) N G XYZ F 0000►00 D,JK LT M Programming The M key numbers are entered into the G-colmn. So if there is a M-key number to be entered always add the letter M. 0 Input of M-values Press M-key then put in number value. -/14 Lti F M-Functions in standard version on F1-CNC MOO - Programmed stop M30 - Program end with re-set M06 - Tool lengths compensation Tool data Tool change M17 - Jump back instruction M99 - Circle parameter M-Functions with the 0NC-interface (accessory) M03 - Spindle clockwise Spindle counterclockwise MO5 MO8 MO9 M2 9 7 i L_ M29 M22 M23 J For details compare chapter 7 Freely available M - functions
  • 87. Description of Block Formats • Depending on the G-functions you have to program different. addresses (enter. values for N,X,Y.,Z,F,M,T,D,S,L,J,K into the columns): For a better overview the single prescriptions are abbreviated. 1. You need a block number N This block number can be 3-digit. Abbreviation: N3 2. The G--address The G-address has two decades; it determines which addresses have to be programmed. 3. X,Y,Z-addresses X,Y,Z addresses may have Vertical milling machine: X ±5, Y t 4, Zt5 Horizontal milling machine Yt 5, Z±4 ) ± signs. 4. F-address (feed) 3 digits, therefore T3 5. 3,K-addresses (circle parameter) 2 digits, therefore J2, K2 6. M-address (auxiliary function) 2 digits, therefore M2 7. T-address (tool number) 3 digits, therefore T3 8. D-address (cutter radius) 5 digits, therefore D5 9. S-address (speed) 4 digits, therefore 54 10. L-address (jump) 3 digits, therefore L3 Example of a format description: Format GOO N3/G00/X ± 41Z ± -5 11. H-address (with M26) 3 digits, therefore H3 4.89
  • 88. Types of controls Types of Controls of CNC-Machine Tools 1. Point-to-Point Control - The tool can move onyl from point to point. - The speed of the tool movement is not registered. - The tool path from point to point is not prescribed. Only the final position has to be correct. Application: Drilling machines, spot welding machines Today rather seldom in use, because most controls offer straight line or contoura.ng characteristics at the same price, 2. Straight Line Control The tool moves with - given speed axis parallel. During the. traverse movement milling is possible. With milling machines either - the longitudinal slide or - the cross slide or - vertical sl od moves, but never two sl i des together! Application: Today hardly in use anymore; replaced by contouring control.
  • 89. ypes OT commis 3. Contouring Control Various axes traverse simultaneously with a programmed feed speed on a prescribed path. The movement can be a straight line or circular movement. Nearly all CNC-machine tools are today equipped with a contouring control. Types of Contouring Controls a) Two-Axes Contouring Control (2D control; 2D means two-dimensional) Application: Lathes, simple milling machines, erosion machines, drawing machines, punch presses, etc.) tr A C1°1
  • 90. Types of controls b) Two and a half Axes contouring Control Three times 2 axes can be moved simultaneously with programmed feed speed and this on a prescribed path. The illustrations are there to show you what is meant by three times 2 axes. Application: Milling machines, machining centers, flame cutting machines, etc.
  • 91. I yldwo vI %elm', s.r c) Three-Axes Contouring Control (3D control) All three axes can traverse simultaneously on a prescribed path with programmed feed speed. Application: Milling machines for the production of complex three-dimensional workpieces. If you traverse in three axes simultaneously you need special milling cutters (round head cutters etc.). Note: There are misunderstandings caused by commonly used technical terms. A milling machine features 3 directions of movements: - longitudinal slide movement - cross slide movement - vertical movement (up and down) This is called a 3-axes machine. However, this does not imply that the machine Is equipped with a 3D contouring control (3-axes contouring control). 4.97
  • 92. Programming - Geometry — The center point path of the cutter - influence of the cutter radius — Trigonometry of the right triangle — CNC conformal lettering, calculation of missing coordinates — Transitions straight line - circular arc tangent — Calculations of auxiliary points Straight line Circular arc tangent
  • 93. Description of the cutter path We describe the center point path of the cutter (except G72, G4S-G46) influence of the cutter radius: When milling contours the cutter diameter determines the programming of the cutter path. Auxiliary points: When programming the center points of the cutter path the target points are called auxiliary points. 7
  • 94. When manufacturing axis-parallel contours the cutter radius has to be added to or subtracted from the contour. With non-axis parallel contours, auxiliary points have to be calculated. For this the trigonometric functions of the right triangle will do. In quite some cases the coordinates of crossing points have to be calculated because they are not indicated in common technical drawings. Missing coordinates are calculated on the basis of trigonometric functions.
  • 95. 1 i IVY" 14J1.111,G,II Survey Trigonometric functions in the right triangle Specification: The right angle (90°) is characterized with the symbol L. Both angles oe, (Alpha) and ( (Beta) are in sum 90°. Hypotenuse cc, /3 = a) 3o° Hypotenuse: Opposite side of right angle. Abbreviation: BY Adjacent side (AS), opposite side (OS): Each angle ae, and /3 has .a adjacent side and a opposite side. Adjacent side = adjacent side to angle oc., or (1 Opposite side = opposite side to angle or (3 GK Sine = — Hy Cosine a = c. sindsin ck = a -- C a c= . sin 04. b = c. cosct AK Hy cos 4 – GK AK tan al-, C cos c4, C Tangent – a = b. tan b– 04..• a tan 4 -14 Cotangent = AK — GK cot b = a. cot 04, = a a– cot 0C., oc., 4.105
  • 96. Calculation of Coordinates CNC-Conformal Lettering The Calculation of Coordinates In many cases the lettering of technical drawings is such that the coordinates for the CNC-programming have to be calculated. Non CNC-conformal lettering CNC-conformal lettering k Missing coordinates data can mostly be calculated using simple trigonometric functions.
  • 97. Calculation of Coordinates Calculation of Coordinates Transitions: Axis-parallel straight line — straight fine at angle The Y-coordinate of point P 3 is not known. tg oc = Y (P P ) 2 3) 3 20 '1 (P 2 P 3) = t"tg • X(P 2 P 3" e4 30° 300. 20 = 11,54 mm Exercise: Calculate the missing coordinate of point P3. Make a CNC-, conformal drawing.
  • 98. Calculation of Coordinates Transition straight line - tangential arc Coordinates of points P 2 , P 1 are not known. 1. Calculate the X-coordinate of S (crossing point between straight line and slant plane) tg tAr = X 30 X = tg 30?30 = 17.32 2. Calculate the X-coordinate of P2.
  • 99. ••■•w.ii a. val 4.4•••■■ •r • ...a.our I VSSFIVIISAF, 3, Calculate the X- and. Y-coordinate of point P-4. SP 1 = 1!..55 mm sin = X 11.55 o X = sin 30 .11.55 = 5.78 mm cos oc = - 11.55 = cos 30 11.55 = 10 mm Letter all points in absolute and incremental mode PC Pi, A111
  • 100. Calculation of Auxiliary Points Calculation of auxiliary points Example 1 You program the path of the milling axis Q0/Q1/Q2/Q3 Points Q i and Q 2 have to be calculated. Cutter dia. 10 mm. 1. Calculate the Y-coordinate of point P9. tg 30° = YP2 30 YP2 = 304 30° = 17.32 mm
  • 101. ualcularion or Auxiliary roinis Example 1 (continued) 2. The path from Q0 to Q i is composed. • of r + 20 mm + k r+204-6X, tg Lk 04,1 = 2 —r ,A X/ = tg-y- •• r = 041 = tg lfi - 1,34 mm OK), = 26,34 mm Coordinates: Q = Workpiece zero-point Qo Qo x Y Q2 0 0 26,34 0 60 A 117
  • 102. Calculation of Auxiliary Points Example 1 (continued) 3. Calculation of YQ2 Y02 = 17,32 — C„ Y2 tg 4.2 6 Yg = Y2 = r 4,2 ntg -72-- = 5.tg 30 = 2,87 mm Y02 = 17.32-2,87 14.45 nun Dimension the auxiliary points in absolute and incremental mode. Fix the workplace zero-point by yourself.
  • 103. Exercise 1 (Calculation of auxiliary Points) Calculate the A X and A Y values, 4.121
  • 104. Calculation of Auxiliary Points Exercise 1 (continued) Dimension the auxiliary points in absolute mode. Workpiece zero-point as in drawing.
  • 105. Calculation of Auxiliary Points Exercise 1 (continued) Dimension the auxiiiary points incremental mcde.
  • 106. Calculation of Auxiliary Points Exercise 2 - Calculate the coordinate of point P 3° - Calculate the missing auxiliary coordinates. Cutter radius lo mm - Pay, attention; angle0C2., is given as interior angle (enclosed angle).
  • 107. 111 i-ilar••••.... •wr • m Exercise 3 Program the exercise in absolute or incremental mode Fix the workpiece zero-point and the cutter radius yourself. 4.129
  • 108. Calculation of Auxiliary Points Example 2 Approach at angle A big safety distance was selected intentionally!) = 3o° S 1 cc, 2 = 6o° = Safety distance (10 mm) Cutter radius (5 mm) r Calculation of point (21 1-Xi: tg4,1 = xi Xi = S tg,t1 10 tg 30° 17;32 mm 2.A Xi: tg 4,1 2 = tg cr. -- • 2 r = tg 15°.5 = = 1,34 mm 3. Distance Ir (PiQl) = = 15 mm
  • 109. %Jai Mt WI LP PA, rlo. OP .W. r-••■• Assns y ■ vs, s air Example 2 (continued) Calculation of point 02 S2 = 20 ram r = 5 mm '14 2 = 600 1. Y2 tg^z= Y2 — Y2 tg4 2 20 — tg 6° —'11,55 mm 2.b Y2 tg I: Y2 2 2 A Y2 = tg 1. 2 2 r = 2.89 mm Describe the coordinates from points Q 1 , Q 2 in connection with P 1 , P2. 4 113
  • 110. Calculation of Auxiliary Points Auxiliary Points with acute Angles With acute angles you have to traverse long no-load paths from target point A to start point B. That takes time. It may happen that the slide movements are too short or there is a collision with a chucking device or you mill into a. workpiece part. Two "short cuts" are common in milling techniques Traverse with various straight lines. Traverse with circular arc.
  • 111. Traverse in circular arc sin oc,? Cos rx 2 — A X 2 = sin A2 / Y? 2 r / = (..os oc 2 . r 4 137
  • 112. Calculation of Auxiliary Points Traverse in circular arc Exercise: Dimensior auxiliary points absolute an incremental. Program absolute and incremental. Select workpiece zerc-point. Program absolute and incremental. Select workpiece zero-point. P i P 2 = 40 mm oc.2. = 300 Ind
  • 113. Calculation of Auxiliary Points Straight line movement
  • 114. Calculation of Auxiliary Points Traverse with various straight lines Exercise: Dimension absolute and incremental, - Program the paths. P 1 P 2 = 40 mm oc 2 300
  • 115. Chapter 5 Programming The contents are arranged according to the numbering of the G-functions G90/G91/G92 G651G66 Compare chapter 4 Compare tape operation RS-232 C operation Chapter 10
  • 116. Hints for the Beginner — Program start point Program target point Tool change point — Potting the cutter path
  • 117. The Start Point of the Program The Tool Change Point The End Point of the Program Just imagine the sequence of operation: the workpiece has to be mounted and dismounted; tools will have to be changed. The start pointof the program should be chosen so that ail handling can be done without any obstacle. The start point of the pkg.gram for the tool shall always be the end point of the program. The tool change point shall be the start .point of program for reason. of simplicity.' Determination of Coordinates Scratch or touch the reference surfaces slightly and move the tool by hand to the selected starting point. Start Point for Chip Removal Position the tool in a safety distance to the workpiece. So you can find out during a program run whether the tool runs into the workpiece because of a programming fault (with rapid traverse). Safety approx. 2 mm
  • 118. Auxiliary Drawings for Programming As with the programming of turned pieces also with the programming of milled pieces the technical drawing is a valuable help. This is particularly true in the beginning. It is easier to set up and check the program. / N.P7 N 68 Turned pieces: '-ts109 You draw and program the path of the edge tip of the tool bit. The edge tip is the part of the tool bit which produces the contour. The tool bit movement is in one plane, thus it is easier to depict. Nil Milted pieces: Here you have to think and to draw in three dimensions. This needs quite some experience. A three-dimensional depiction is very distinct but not easy to do, Besides that, all paths which are not parallel to axis show shortened.
  • 119. A separate drawing is a great help for the first exercises. An example: 1. Enter into a sketch the program start point of the cutter. 2. If you firstly move in Z-direction to the milling plane you can draw in the workpiece and the cutter path. E 2.1. Mark the raw stock contour and the finished part contour. 5.5
  • 120. 2.2. Draw in the cutter paths. Mark the various auxiliary points. Draw in the direction of movement. 2.3. Number the various blocks. The checking of the program will be much easier. 3. Blocks with no traverse movements programmed can be assigned to the auxiliary points. 4. With absolute programming draw in zero-point of workpiece.•
  • 121. GOO - Rapid Traverse Straight line approach movement Incremental programming Absolute programming AEICILUTE 880 x*8 y 311100 The target point is described from the starting point of the cutter. Wie/x4000/V4,4-scie The target point is described from the previously fixed zero-point of the coordinates system.
  • 122. G00.3 GOO - Rapid Traverse Ali movements are carried cut with the highest possible speed, i.e. rapid traverse (with the Fl-CNC: 600 mm/min). - GOO is no chip removal movement but a movement without milling cutter being in action. (i) 11111 X (0) (K) Y (S) 11111 F (L) (1) (14) = MEM MN MOM= ISM.. 00 00 000 0 04 00 0 0 0 0r 0 S0 0 - 2 000 0 - No programming of feed (F) because the slide moves with rapid traverse when GOO is programmed. 03 I Programming Exercises In order to move the milling cutter to its working position you have various possibilities, 2 1. Traverse only in 1 axis The two other axes are zero. - You have six possibilities. Program all of them, absolute and incremental, 4 2 3 3 I 2 04
  • 123. a) Incremental Value Programming: - The milling cutter is in the position which is indicated in the drawing. - It is moved to milling position with GOO. b) Absolute Value Programming: - Milling cutter is moved to milling po-. sition. - Program the traverse paths &GOO. 5
  • 124. G01:17 2. Traverse In one block simultaneously in 2 axes Program absolute and incremental. - The zero•point of the z:::ordinate system for the absolute proqramming is in point Pc. Draw in the possibilities. Question: How many possibilities are given if you move all three axes simultaneously?
  • 125. U-6.711 I GO1 - Straight Line interpolation • Straight line cutting movement, feed programming necessary. Incremental programming Absolute programming X 25 mm Z 18 mm X 40 mm Z 5 mm Y 32 mm G01/X2500/Y1800/Z = 0/F ... G01/X4000/Y3200/Z -500/F... The target point is described from the starting point of the cutter. The target point is described from the previously fixed zero-point of the coordinates system. R.rzni
  • 126. 5-G01 GO1 - Linear Interpolation Linear means straicTht lined_ interpolat_ion means the finding of intermediate values. - GOI is a chip removal movement. - With each chip removal movement you have t.:7J program a feed. Format GO1 N3/G01 /X• ± 5/Y ± 4/Z ± 5/F3 With GOl you can traverse parallel to axis and at each angle in one plane.
  • 127. 5.(401 Examples GO1 (1) Milling of a Shoulder - Milling cutter dia. lo ME - Mode of programming: incremental. - A shoulder with a width of 5 mm and a depth of 4 mm has to be milled. ) I Li-) 5 5 ( 50 ) -11. 1. Determining the starting point as indicated. 2, Programming with GOO to the starting point of chip removal. Choose a safety distance of 5 mm.
  • 128. 5-G01 Example (1) (continued) Determination of the Path for the Milling Cutter With a diameter- of the milling cutter of lo mm and a width of the shoulder of 5 mm, the axis of the cutter is exactly at the edge of the workpiece. Programming: Program end position is starting position. N. X N G (M) 00 04 •0 Ia 0z 04 6 000 of o 94 0S • i it a (J) (K) (0) 2000 0 -S-00o 0 -30o0 , IS) Z F (I-) (T) fit 0 0 0 s-000 0 -3100 o o o 0 Zoo 0 2.00 -Coo* o 2 to 20o 0 3 op is M30 Exercise 2 for Example 1 - Program this example in absolute values. - Carry out a zero-point offset with G92. - Starting position and zero-point of workpiece as in drawing.
  • 129. 5-G01 GO1 - Example 2 Milling a Groove - Mode of programming: .incremental - Dia. cf milling cutter: lo mm - Starting position as in drawing - Depth of groove: 4 mm - Feed (compare technological data) - Safety distance before cutting; 3 mm Pay attention: When feeding in the cutter, halve the feed values,
  • 130. 5-G01 Exercise 1 for Example 2 I Write the program according to the traverse paths as indicated, 4) (J) X (D) mori( u (f) (H) 1.111EME11 111111.111E1 Exercise 2 for Example 2 Program the example absolute with zeropoint offset, ON x (J) (D) Y (K) (S) F (L) (T) (H) IIMIPM ill=n1. Exercise 3 for Example 2 Choose other traverse paths for GOO. N G (M) X (J) ( 0)
  • 131. 001 — Example 3 Milling a Pocket - Milling cutter dia. lo mm. - Starting position as in drawing - Safety distance before cutting 5 mm Choose the path of the milling cutter such that there is always an overlap of 1-2 mm (in industry approx. 1/10 of the dia. of the cutter is chosen).
  • 132. 5-G01 Drawing the Path of the Milling Cutter I Dimensioning An important support for your programming work is an appropriate drawing. Enter the block number Mark begin and end of the block - Use the largest possible scale when drawing. Dimension auxiliary measurements Program this groove as in the drawing in absolute and incremental mode. Programming sketch and dimensioning of auxiliary measurements for absolute programming. N (M) X (J) (D) (K) (S) (L) IT) (HI remarks
  • 133. 5-G01 Drawing the Path of the Milling Cutter Dimensioning Programming sketch and dimensioning of auxiliary measurements for incremental programming. ( 1-1(T) (H) remarks
  • 134. 5-G01 Example 4 The milling path in example 3 would leave the corners in the pocket unfinished. With pocket milling you cut a rough pocket first. With a final cut you mill the complete contour once again to reach a better surface quality. Exercise: - Program and mill the given pocket. - As final run a continuous smooth cut of 2 mm shall be taken off. Mode of programming as you wish. - Select the zero point of the workpiece yourself.
  • 135. 5-G01 Example 5/G01 Milling a Cross Slot of 45° Diameter of milling cutter 8 mm. Program the zero point of the workpiece using absolute value programming.. Make a drawing and use reference dimensions! D 0 / /. , N 4111--- (50) --40. 1. Start position: Milling 5 mm away from theoretical X-edge 5 mm away from theoretical Y--edge 2. Target position.; As indicated (X 5 mm, Z 5 mm)
  • 136. 5.001 Example 6: Bores 4 x 90° 4 The center point coordinates of the bolt circle are known. + The coordinates of the bores have to be calculated. sin d— = R. lin 45° = 15.0,707 = 10,6 cos X1 = R. cos 45° = 15.0,707 = 10,6 Since the bores are positioned symmetrically to the center point, you can calculate the X,Y coordinates of the other bores (by adding or subtracting). Dimension the drawing for CNC-manufacture - in absolute and incremental mode. Program the example.
  • 137. 5-G01 Example 7: Bores 6 x 60° 3 15 Bolt circle 6 x 600 - Calculate the coordinates of the bores. - Dimension the part for CNC programming. - Program example. Incremental programming
  • 139. Example 8: Hexagon Use cutter die. 16 mm 1. You calculated the coordinates of the corner points in one of•the previous examples. Transfer the values for points to 6. 2. You have to calculate the auxiliary coordinates of the cutter center path. val 010
  • 140. Gal Example 8: Hexagon You have to add respectively substract the A X and radius values to the co- ordinate values of points 1,2,3,4,5,6. Calculation of tg L. X— tg „, Put in measurements for auxiliary points. program the example! Pay attention whether there is remaining material at the outer corners. If yes, mill it off.
  • 141. 54iU2ASU3 The Milling of Circular Arcs On conventional machine tools circular arcs can be produced only using special auxiliary devices. On CNC-machines circular arcs of any angle or radius can be reached without such special devices. The key information for circular arcs is GO2 and G03.
  • 142. GO2JG03, 3 G02 - Circular Interpolation Clockwise G03 - Circular Interpolation Counterclockwise In order to formulate what you mean by clockwise and counterc/ockwise,•we have to determine the direction from which we look at. Determination You have always to look at the sense of rotation in one plane from the positive direction of the third axis. Interpolation Clockwise G02 XY-Plane: Cook from +7, direction to -Z direction. YZ-Plane: Look from --)( to -X.
  • 143. 54302/UOU Interpolation. G02 Clockwise XZ-Plane: Look from +' to In this technical sketch the direction the la-plane seems to be inverted. in "nette-ines
  • 144. GO2JG03. 5 Arcs on the PI-CNC Milling Machine Metric Inch Size of radii 0,01. - 99,99 mm in steps of 0,01 mm Size of radii 0,001 - 3.999 Inch in steps of 1/1000 inch Programming On the F1-CNC you can program quarter arcs (90 ° ) or arcs of circles in steps of 1°. FA °--** G 02 Programming of arcs 90° on the Fl-CNC Pz(XYZ) 1. The sense of rotation is described with 002/G03. 2. The end point of the quarter arc is determined) by the X,Y,Z addresses either starting from point PA (incremental) or from the workpiece zeropoint (absolute). 3. The F-address is used to describe the feed. 1:3z (XYZ) Format O f G2 N31 Go3X±5(±4)/Y ±4(±5)/Z±5/F3 ±4 resp. t 5 with X,Y-values for vertical resp. horizontal axis system.
  • 145. GO2JG03, Programming of Quarter Arcs in the XY-Plane Format G02/G03 1G021 ± 51Y± 41Z =0 /F3 N31G031X G02 incremental Programming Example: radius 10 mm Programmed are X,Y values looked at from the starting point. =El= 02 I 02 02 02. • Y -1000 -1000 1000 +1000 1111 0 0 0 0 ... Arc Arc Arc Arc 1 2 3 4 Attention: In the XY-plane the Z-value has to be programmed with zero. cf.:noir:An 7
  • 146. GO2JG03. 9 G02 - Absolute Programming Zero-point of workpiece as indicated in drawing. You program the XY-coordinates of the end point of quarter arc, looked at from the previously fixed point (W). +X Note: Arcs can be moved only in one plane. Thus, the Z-value of the previous block has to be taken over. Block N0I/NO2: Move to start position Block N7: Infeed in Z -100 Block N8/N9: Arcs 1,2 set deeper G X Y 000 92 0 0 01 00 2000 2000 2 01 2000 2000 3 02 3000 1000 4 02 2000 5 02 1000 1000 0 6 02 2000 2000 0 7 01 2000 2000 -100 8 02 3000 1000 -100 9 02 2000 • 10 0 0 Z F 1000 1000 .. , Position milling cutter at star t. G02 0 0 -100 Position milling cutter at sta: t GO2
  • 147. LIU-4W. 11 Exercises G03 - Incremental Programming - Position of milling cutter at start as indicated in drawing. - Circle is in XY-plane Z=0 - Start the circle programming in point "0". N G (M) (J) X (0) F Z (K) (S) (L) (T) (H) 111.181.1 IlplarllIllE G03 - Absolute Programming - Position of milling cutter at start as indicated in drawing. - Carry out offset of zero point. - Circle is parallel in XY-plane, but at a distance Z 4-10 mm. - Start the circle programming in point "0". X Y IIII F LaimEn riames Me (J) (D) (K) SS) (L) (I) (H) c e•nrslr_ fte) 44
  • 148. G021G03. 13 Programming Exercise G02/G03 Mode of Programming: incremental - Approach direction as in drawing - Determine starting point yourself - Determine drawing with dimensioning of triangulation .(station). ct" 0 I (50) ilw Approach direction as in drawing.
  • 149. G02/G03, 15 Programming Exercise G02/G03 Alternative 1 Mode of Programming: absolute - Zero-point of workpiece as in drawirig, - Starting point of milling cutter as in drawing. - Dia of milling cutter lc mm. Alternative 2 - Mode of programming: absolute - Zero-point of workpiece as in drawing - Starting point as in drawing,
  • 150. G02.101 17 Y-Z Plane Exercise Mode of programming: incremental - Circle in YZ-plane - Start point as in drawing .C3 f X (J) I D) tK) Y [SI 4- Exercise Mode of programming: absolute Zero-point as in drawing - Start point and end point for programming is workpiece zero-point. N ' 1M) X (.•A (0) (K) {S) F (l)(T)(H)1
  • 151. tilIZRIU4. -1U Circles X-Z Plane Exercise - Mode of programming: incremental - Starting point as in drawing i N4) V X (J1 (D) F (S) 4 Exercise - Mode of programming: absolute - Zero-point as in drawing - Starting point and end point for programming is the zero-point. N G M1 X (J) (0) (K) (S) 4 e nevlinfl e2 10
  • 152. 0021G03, 21 Some Terms for Circular interpolation G02/03 Complete circle programming A circle up to 360° can be programmed in one block. Quadrants programming A circle is divided into 4 quadrants. In one block only one arc of max. 90° can be programmed. The arc of circle has to be Within a given quadrant. In this case two blocks are necessary because the arc reaches over 2 quadrants. Fl-CNC Quadrants programming• - To program a part of an arc within a quadrant, a code in two blocks is used.
  • 153. Arcs with Angles at Random On the F1-CNC arcs in steps of 10 each can be programmed. The programming is done in various subsequent blocks. Mode of programming: incremental (The following examples are in the XXplane; for all other planes this principle is valid too). Radius 10 mm First block Here the 90° arc in which the partial arc circle is situated will be determined. N100/G02/X1000/Y -1000/Z . . . /F . . With G02 the computer is given infor• mation on the sense of rotation. With X 1000/Y -1000 the computer knows the quadrant ( I sign of X,Y) and the radius of the arc. Next block . N101/M99/..1 = 0/K =30 M99 is the key information for the arc 90°. Blocks N100/101 are considered by the computer to be one unit. The computer asks whether there is a M99 instruction in the block following a 002/G03 instruction. J-address: for the grades statement. of the start of the arc •within the quadrant. K-address: target address of the arc. Statement in grades. g.nn9/ruln 9:1
  • 154. G 02/G03. 25 Example Incremental value programming N100/G02/X1000/Y -1000/Z=0/F.. N:01/M99/J2-=/K67 Example Incremental value programming Arc of circle reaching over a few quadrants. N100/002/X1000/Y1000/Z=0/F... N101/M99/332/K90 Arc in quadrant I. N102/G02/X1000/Y -1000/Z=0/F..., Arc in quadrant II. N103/G02/X -1000/Y -1000/Z=0/F.., N104/M99/J=0/1(28 Arc in quadrant III.
  • 155. Using the Chart The chart shows you the 3,K-values, the exact grades and the coordinates of points for a circle with radius 1. In order to program the cutter path it is often necessary to calculate the coordinates of the arc starting (PA) and target point (P2). These points are missing in many drawings. (All examples are in the X,Y-plane, the same principle is valid for all other planes too) Example: X(a) and Y(b) coordinates of the target point (PZ) are not known. Calculation a a= R•i 1 cos 46.0l = = R.ccs46.01 a = 10 - 6.945 = C.945.1! = 3.0567 = 7.194 Calculation: b sin 46-01 t = = These values can also be read from the chart. 5-G021G 03.27
  • 156. Circular Interpolation - Parameter XYZ-Values at the Circle 1 F , J,K ' oJ Grad 0 1 j a b XYZ 0 XYZ 0 -1181 .I 0 1 1 347 0 2 I 1.98! 14 S 1 3.02 1 708 28 4 1 4.06 889. 1 43 5 11 5.10 1 56 1056 6 , 6.05 1222 69 7 ' 7.0/ 1403 97 8 1 8.06 ' 1569 9.03 1 125 9 1736 10 ! 9.99 i 153 I 1903 11 10.96 ' 181 2069 12 11.93 1 208 2250 13 12.99 1 250 2431 14 1 14.05 ; 292 2597 15 ; 15.03 ,1 333 2764 375 16 I 16.02 2931 17 1 17.02 1 431 18 ' 18.03 1 486 3264 19 19.03 1 542 3431 20 20.04 1 597 ! 1 3583 653 31 1 20.97 / 3750 22 . 3917 23 I 23.04 : 792 4069 24 24 . 00 I 861 4222 25 I 24.96 1 931 26 I 25 . 9 2 1000 4375 4542 27 1 26.99 1 1083 4694 28 1 27.98 ' 1167 1250 4.347 29 1 28.98 5000 1333 30 ; 23.98 1 5153 31 1 30.97 ! 1417 5306. 1514 32 ! 32.01 5456 33 1 33.05 1 1611 5597 34 1 34.02 1 1708 5736 35 i 34.99 J' 1806 5875 36 35.96 11903 6014 37 1 36.33 1 2088 6153 38 1 37.95 1 2111 6292 39 1 38.97 / 2222 6431 233S 40 I 39.98 1 1 41 i 41.00 1 2444 ' 6569 ' 6694 42 1 41.96 I 2556 6813 43 1 42,97 i 2631 6944 44 1 43.98 1 2886 70819 45 1 45.00 . 29S! 1.03 511111:: S097 22.00 ; 722 a 1 ; J.K ! ) XYZ Grad ,• T b : XYZ 1 -4 46 46.01 I 3056 i 7194 1 47 I 47.02 : 3181 1 7319J 48 1 49.03 3906 ' 7444 7556 49i 48.99 1 3431 50 50.01 1 3569 s 7667 1 7778 I . 51 7889 I 52 52.04 1 3847 8008 3986 53 53.06 54 54.03 i 4125 1 8087 I 4264 1 8194 55 , 55.00 4403 8292 i 56 55.97 4542 57 56.94 8389 8486 1 58 . 57.98 j 4694 8583 4847 59 , 59.02 8667 5000 60 60.01 8750 5153 61 : 61.01 5306 J 8833 62 1 62.01 8917 5458 63 I 6:3.00 9000 5825 64 I 64.07 5778 9069 65 I 65.03 1 9133 66 I 65.39 I 5931 67 1 66.95 ; 6083 : 9208 6250 I 9278 68 ; 67.99 9347 6417 68 1 68.82 6569 1 9403 1 70 1 69.95 9458 :1 71 1 70.96 r 6736 72 ' 71.96 ! 6903 : 3514 : 7:3 72.97 , 7069 9569 74 73.97 7236 1, 9625 9667 75 74.96 7403 7569 1 9708 76 75.94 77 77,00 , 750 • 9750 . 78 73.06 , 7931 ; 9792 ' 9819 79 73.03 i 8097 80 , 80.00 1 8364 ! 9847 9875 1 81 ; 80.96 r 8431 22 1 31.93 : 8397 9903 1 5931 1 83 1 82.98 8778 9944 84 1 83.94 I 8944 9111 9958 ! :35 ' 84.99 . . 86 1 85.93 ; 9292i 9972 1 87 1 86.97 I 9472 1 9986 1 28 1 38.01 1 9653 10000 89 188.96 i 9813 10000 80 1 90.00 10000 10000 1 ,. 1 L 51.02 1 378 8
  • 157. "J1 In the charts the a,b values are indicated far the standard circle in 4 digits. IS 17 16.02 17,02 13 19 2e 18.08 19.03 20.04 21 22 23 24 25. 20.97 22,00. 23.04 24.00 24.96 26 27 29..32 26.99 27.98 28.98 2q.9R 28 29 le Example 2764 375 431 486 542 597 2931 3097 3264 3431 653 722 792 961 a-value: 0,0931 mm. b-value: 0,4222 mm :749:33 3750 3317 4069 4222 1000 4375 4942 4694 4847 5000 108 1167 1250 1223 30 ,97 32.0 33.05 34.02 34.9 q 14i71514 1611 I708. 1806 5153 ! 53:06 5458 5597 5796 35.96 36 3 -7 • 36.93 :3:3,9 33 38.9' 40 39.98 130.2 2000 2111 52-79 6014 31 "::::2 33 34 35 41 42 41.0 41.96 44 45 4 7:..:.32 45,0c Radius 1 mm 25 0(24,96) ! 6292 . 6431 2444 6569 6684 i 6816 6944 7:"1:-:-.7=, ! 21:::21 2805 2931 , a,b values with radius sizes Example 2222 2: --25 Values (a, b) for any desired angle (random) j = qt."' Radius a = 0,2444 x = 0,6369 x mz: = = valuc-•s must b p. pfogram.T;e:d rcunding c±ff. • Tb a -11. c z1
  • 158. G02/G03. 33 The statement of angles is always programmed from the quadrant start. Thus, the a,b values may have X,Y and Z characteristics. Exercise: Put in the a,b values of quadrants IV and I. Radius 10 mm IV I Radius 27 mm IV a j
  • 159. Exercise: Put in the coordinates fat PO, PA, Pz and PE. Radius AC, mm Pe P Radioc 38 mm 5-G02/G03.35
  • 160. G02/G03. 37 Programming of Arcs # 90° in absolute Mode #y For a better understanding some details on the Fl-CNC computer: In the memory (RAM) the 90° arcs (Quadrants) are stored with the block: N.../G02/x=150o/Y-1000/z.... The computer knows - sense of rotation (G02) - position and size of the 90° arc (statement of coordinates of end point PE of 90° arc). The starting coordinate Po of the 90° arc is known to the computer from the previous block. In the computer, this quadrant is divided into 90 steps of 1° each. Manufacture of the 90° arc The computer instruction is: Traverse all 90 steps of the programmed quadrant.
  • 161. La ULF %ALPO. Ov Programming of Arcs from 0° to a * 90° We instruct the computer to edit only a part of the 90 steps - This is done with the M99 information J=0 to K=30 Flow in the computer N99/G01/X.0/Y= SOO/Z NIGO/G02/X=1500/Y=1000/7 N101/M99/J=0/ 1. The computer checks whether starting and end coordinates of the 90° arc are correct. It compares the coordinates of blocks N99 and N100 2. The computer asks whether there is a M99 instruction in the following block. No All 90 steps are edited Yes - It calculates ("theoretically") all steps up to J. - It edits traverse Instructions from J to K - It calculates from K to 90° without editing instructions. g .11 n 9m1 n 1 qa
  • 162. G021G03, 41 Programming a # 0° to a = 90° in absolute Mode I. Programming to point PA NI00/G01/X616/Y468/Z.... 2. Arc = 28° to 67° 2.1. Description of the 90° arc: N101/G02/X1616/Y1468/Z.... The absolute coordinates of the quadrant end point PE are described starting from point PA. By computation this is the end point of the quarter arc. XE = XA /R/ YE = YA t /R/ ZE = ZA 2.2. N102/M99/J28/K67 Flow of data in the computer Manufacture 1. The computer checks whether coor- dinates of starting point PA and quadrant end point PE are correct (absolute). 2. M99 instruction exists. a) Computer proceeds up to J28 (= 280 ) - without traverse instruction, b) It gives traverse instructions from J28 to K67 (28°-67°). The impulses from J28 to K67 are worked through. The indicated quadrant is manufactured from starting point PA to target point PZ.
  • 164. GOVG03. 43 A Method of programming Arcs a 90° (absolute) With partial arcs GC # 90° it is often necessary to calculate starting and target point of the previous and the following blocks: thus it is useful to establish a chart. Specification: PA - Starting point of partial arc of circle PZ - Target point of partial arc of circle PE - End point of quadrant ("theoreti-' cal" target point) PO - Starting point of quarter arc. Examples:
  • 165. %A %Orme •...1,61.‘lw Coordinates PA: PA is the target point of the lolock before the circle .programming XA YA ZA 4 1) PE: "Theoretical" end point of the quarter arc XE = XA + R YE = YA + R ZE = ZA (interpolation in the pane) +X PZ: Programmed target point XZ = XA + P X YZ = YA + L1 Y ZZ = ZA (interpolation in the plane) +X Coordinates path of the_partial radius X = XPZ - XPA Y = YPZ - YPA A Z = 0 (interpolation in the plane) P0: Theoretical starting point of the quarter arc X0 = XA - a YO = YA b ZO = ZA 5-G 021G03. 45
  • 166. G021G03. 47 Exercise: Put in X,Y-values, Z-value = 0 Y X PA PE Pz +X Po L Program the path W-PA.,Pz-P1 Z
  • 167. G02/G03. 49 Exercise: Put in X,Y-vaiues f Z-value = 0 Program path W -PA - Pz -P1 PA z X PE • Pz Po L N M} WI ) 1") (K) (S) (L) 0.) (H) remarks 11 ea • ••• aft A." •
  • 168. G02/001. 51 , ism Exercise: Slot 3 mm deep 34' Programming: in . absclute mode Zero point of workpiece as in drawing. air XV -a— .4 4 27 im. .50 st.
  • 169. .Lit,14 G04 - Dwell If you manufacture a borehole and withdraw the drill after you have reached the desired depth, then the chip will be torn off. The base of the borehole has steps. With boreholes of tapered shape this often does not matter. With shouldered boreholes, however, it can be disturbing. The same applies for milling cutters of larger diameter or for fly wheel cutter if you move away suddenly. You have an unwanted shoulder in the workpiece. ;In such cases a dwell should be programmed. Programming The tool remains 0,5 seconds in the programmed position of the previous block. r "%AA 4
  • 170. 5•G21 G21 - Empty Line You may program as many empty lines as you wish in a program. The empty lines are jumped over in the program sequence. In the place of empty lines you can program at later stage other G- or auxiliary functions.
  • 171. Subroutines G25/M1 7 The subroutines are "managed" by the main program. In the main program the movements are programmed up to the starting point for the subroutines. MAIN PROGRAM At the end cf. a sabr--_:uLlri structisn is given to the main progr.,im. tz..e in- 5-G25. 1
  • 172. 5-G25 Subroutines It happens quite often that varlous operations cf same shape :ire manufact,ired at one and tne same workpiece. Example - 4 geometrically identical nocker.s. - For the manufacture of each :'.00ket the milling . cutter has to no move.-a to working position. - The programming and man1Lfactar1ng process is the same for each individual pocket. You program in one program pocket milling for 4 times. These identical operations may be programmed just once and then "stored". If they are needed they are called up To our example 1. The tool is moved to the first miiihg start point. ----Start and endpoint of subroutine 2. The subroutine is caned up. The first pocket is being milled. 3. The tool is then moved to the second milling start point. 4. Subroutine is caned up. / S. The tool is then moved te the thira milling start point. G. Subroutine is called Subroutine etc.
  • 173. Principle: Call-up of Subroutine and Sequence on Fl -CNC MAIN PROGRAM UP UP:
  • 174. 6-G25 Subroutine-Programming G25 Jump to Subroutine Ml 7 Jump back to Main Program 1. Programming up to the first start of the subroutine (assume NO5). 2. Call up subroutine G25 in block NO6t N06/G25/1,100 - With G25 the subroutine is called up, NOO/G90 r---- NO6/G25/1,100 N07/GOO N/M30 - Under. the F-address we describe the block number with which the subroutipe begins. In ' this case the subroutine begins with block no. N100 (the block no. is selected by the programmer). 3_ The subroutine: N 100/ N101... N102 N703... N104 ,.. N105/G01 In the subroutine the operation to be repeated is described (block N100 to block NIOS) 1-4,--N100/G91 N105/G00 N106/M17 4. Jump back instruction M17! At the end of a subroutine you have the jump back instruction M17, The program jumps to the following block with which the subroutine was called up.
  • 175. Example - Programming main program: absolute - Programming subroutine: incremental - Zero point of workpiece as in drawing - Reference point set-off as in drawing - Diameter of milling cutter 8 mm Continue the program. Start point shall be end point of program. In block N05 the workpiece zero-point is programmed again. t4 G IM) X (J) (D) 00 92 MI 8 iY46 C 00 Is 92 30 25 900 900 34 o0 Y (K) (5) a 5 2000 900 .900 900 900 F I)-tir)(H) 3M0 r Of 0 3 ow 200 LSD 200 2.o0 t-5-0 50 9► 51 Of 2 0 0 0 53 Of 5-4 oi 700 0 -700 700 6$" Of b - 701 56 00 57 Hel 0 0 0 - 6 D0 TO 140 0 0 T 40 '44 0 0 -(40 .600
  • 176. 5-Ci25 More Subroutines You can write as many subroutines In a program as you like. Example The slots 1 + 2 are subroutine no. 1. The slots 3 + 4 are subroutine no. 2 The program shows an incremental main program. N000 Subroutine -N005 instructions N006 / G25. / LSO N007 Jumps back /GOO N008 / G25 / L60 N009 NO10 NO11 /GOO / +111 G25 / L50 /GOO NO12 / G25 / L60 C 0 0 N013 /GOO 'Of N014 (/) U 0 0 N... / M30 as 0 cn --la N050 / G -4.-N051 -b-N052 Subroutine 1 -11-N053 -41-N054 -41-N055 -IwN056 M17 Jump back instruction 4J 0 —N060 -0.14061 -1.-N062 -41.N063 -4-N064 -s-N065 -0-N066 Subroutine 2 M17 Jump back instruction 0 9
  • 177. (Hi (i)(i) (S) (N) A N (0g) . . imilimbiI a r CL 9 OE 1111111PriN „v. - CO 9 buTTT7w io laaampTia - .apow TrquamaxouT ul sauTqnoaqns 5TMJP aoaTd)lom lo quTod o,zaz - UT .6uTm p zp --qns7 t UT s p -luTod .sauTqnoa oa-rcINJom agq areJEload aidwex3 c7n-c 8 111
  • 178. 5425 Part of a subroutine You can also call up parts of subroutines. An example: - Slot 11) and slot (2) are icirti1 and contained in cross slot 3 and 4. - You write a subroutine for slot and 4. N100/G91 N101/G01 to N108 N109/M17 You can use block N105 to 106 for the manufacture of slot 1 and 2. It is possible to call up parts of a subroutine. In this example: Block N105 to N109 / M17
  • 179. 6-G25 Part of a subroutine program The scheme shows an incremental main program. In an absolute Main program you have to determine the workpi.ece zero-point with G92. NCC NO5 Milling cutter is positioned for subroutine NOC.- 025 L100 N07 / GOO -4 4_1! 01 ,--1 ! m' Noe / G23 / L100 ....s c --4 NO9 / G00 N10 / G:. N11 / GOO. G:5 . it— "W i L105 -NO L10 • • —LØP r moo N101 N102 =.=4 N103 N104 111111' N105 S N106 • N10: N108 N109 M17
  • 180. 5.G25 Example G25/M17 • Program this example: Width of slot E. mm Depth of slot 3 mm Zero point of workpiece as in drawing Decide yourself between absolute or Lncremental value crogramming. Scart point as in drawing. lo 29 50 rye x WI (DI (X) Y (S) MIMI •1111•IN 111111111111M IIIIIIIIIIIIININNIIII r 11111MENIIIIIIIIIM MINN 111111•111 IIIIIIIIIININIMIIIIIIIMI III MIMIIIIIII • III alErano ammm=11W1111111111111 IIIIIIIMIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIM
  • 181. Example: You have to mill a rectangular slot. Since the slot is deep you need a few runs; these are identical in the XYplane. Example: - Miii cutter is al;eady cutting at block -no. N005. - NO06 is jump subroutine. - The subroutine consists of blook.Nloi to N105. - N105 )s -jump back to main program. - NO07 is inreed in main program. - N008 is jumc to subroutine. etc.
  • 182. 5425 Exercise Program the workpiece. The depth cf cut be reached in 3 runs. Jo I 1 0.4 "cr 42 50 F M (1-1) remarks
  • 183. D-taZO Exercise - Make a sketch indicating the start point. - Determine. the zero point. Jii) - Main program: absolute - CirQuLar slot in 2 runs Depth of slot 10 mm (M) 25 (50) (J) x (D) (L) (1) 111 1111111111111 EMI
  • 184. 5-G25 The Nesting of Subroutines CaIt-up – Sequence MAIN PROGRAM Nil UI Us
  • 185. 5-027 G27 - Jump Instruction Format N31G27/L3 milliLW IIMIIIIIE's - ...... ..... G IM) N X (J) (D) z V (K) IS) F (L) ( r) (H) ,, ..•,...= --dm 011 ,20 omare, ...... . With this in.str...icieri backward are : LiL - :2-1-:, er the rogramme' the -,Drc.gram .13,3 :ess tc the cc E 'cicck where Example 1 3 :::ck IT instrac.t;,cn to jump Block 120 Instru:tin to _lump pack NI Application N G (M) (J) X (0) y (K) (S) 11/ F IL) MK - You describe a finishing to N12). IEEE L f 5111111111•111111111 I 1 Ell e (M) X (J) (D) Y (K) (S) Z IE MINN 11•11111 1111311131 4 11111111111111•11111111 rill finishing program p rogram (N4 - In the block proceeding the f nisning operation you program 021. finishing program um= Eria..... N - The surface of the work p iece shall be worked or not, - In blocks N4 to N12 the finishing c71r. is carried out. F (L) (T)(H) Jump instruction /3 111 WPM MINIM mita i io 1111.11 llEjl IMIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII NMI If the surface should remain unfinished: Delete N3/G21 Program N3/G27/L13 The blocks N4 to N12 are skipped.
  • 186. 5-G40/G48 The Cutter Radius Compensation Parallel to Axis G40 - Cancel the compensation G45 - Add cutter radius G46 - Deduct cutter radius G47 - Add cutter radius twice G48 - Deduct cutter radius twice G45/G46/G47/G48 are self-maintaining functions. They are revoked by G40 or M30 (program end). G45 can be overwritten by G46/G47/G46 and vice-versa. Before programming G45/G46/G47/G4d y ou have tc describe the too: data under M06. In examples up to now we have always been programming the center line path of the cutter. With the lengths to be worked the cutter radii had to be added or deducted. This calculation work can be taken over by the computer, if appropriate informations are given. I + 2D
  • 187. a4.2 14V1 41 4+0 G45 - Adding Milling Cutter Radius Programming incremental cutter shal touch the in The side of the contour. Conventional programming: N.../G00/X=1±rf The radius has tID cc added to the length I. Programming with G45 (Adding Cutter Radius) 1113 IN (J) X Y (Di D 500 (K) F (L.)11) (H) (S) S2. D O(' 1. The computer has to .r.ow the cutter radius so that it can. calculate the correct movement (1 r). 0 ril In one of the previous blocks the tool data have to be describe, otherwise alarm sign A18. 2. Call up G45:Add cutter radius once. . • „ o OMilim o.s Soo III 3. Program movement. Measure L (30) The computer picks up the tool data from the M06 instruction which was programmed last. • 3000 Cancel the cutter radius compensation •N.../G40 n_r/Aftlf4Aft
  • 188. 5-G40/G48 G46 - Deducting the Cutter Radius Mode of programming: incremental Cutter shall touch outer contour. Cutter dia. lo mm Programming: N100/M00/W3C0 S2000/Y=0 / .F1 N101/G46 N102/GOI/X=L/Y=0/Z.=0/F. L The cutter moves by the distance 1-1). Approaching an Edge - Not parallel to Axis ti Programming: incremental Cutter dia. 16 mm Reference dimension H Z ---- 0 11e1/M06/D800./S1700/Y=0/T(F)1 NO2/G46 NO3/GOI/X4000/Y2000/Z=0/F... 14°44/M30 40 Approaching an Edge - Not parallel to Axis Pro gramming: absolute - Cutter dia. 16 mm Zero-point as in jrawing 40 NOO/G92/X-4000/Y-3500/21000/ NO1/M06/DE00/52000/2=0/T01 NO2/046 NO3/G00/X=0/Y=0/21000 NO4/M30
  • 189. 5-G401048 Exercises G45/G46 - Program the distance/ traverse P 1 -P absolar_c! and Irlementai. mc•de. - Radius D: 12 mm - Zero-point frca FoLnt P. N G F (Lic—n(t (M) +y N G thA) Y X (J) (D) )S} (K) Z F ()..i sT,,:!—I; . N G ( M) (J) N G !M) (J1 Y X (5) (D) (K) (Di . v K) (S) X — Z F tl..} (T. (1.4) Z F Li iTT)(i-!)
  • 190. 5-G40/G48 G47 - Add Cutter Radius Twice - Outside contour shall be milled - Mcde of programming: incremental - Cutter radius 6 mm - Starting point as in drawing Programming: NO00/M06/D600/S2000/2=0/TtF:i N1/G46 N2/G01/X2000/Y1500/Z=0 F.., N3/G47 N4/G01/X4000/Y=0/Z=0/F... N5/G01/X=0/Y3000/Z=0/F... N6/GO1/X -4000/Y=0/Z=0/F., N7/G01/X=0/Y -3000/Z=0/F... N8/G46 40 15 20 N9/G00/X -2000/Y -1500/Z=0/ N10/M30 • 1..j Block N4 to N7 Cutter radius is added twice. Block NO2, N9 Cutter radius is deducted once. Cutter path plotted
  • 191. Urt1414AULF0 Programming exercise: Cutter radius 5 mm Incremental programming Starting from point P1 Absolute programming Determining the zero-point starting from point Pi. (L)(11iH) c_rlAnirtmg
  • 192. 5-0401G48 G48 - Deduct Cutter Radius Twice Example: Milling an inside contour - Milling cutter radius 6 mm - Mode of programming: incremental Program: N000/M06/D600/52000/Y=0/T(F)1 N1/045 N2/000/X2000/Y1500/Z=0 N3/001/X=0/Y=0/Z -500/F... N4/G48 N5/001/X4000/Y=0/Z=0/F... N6/001/X=0/Y3000/Z=0/F... N7/GO1/X -4000/Y=0/2=0/F... N8/001/X=0/Y -3000/Z=0/F... Block N3: move in. N9/001/X=0/Y=0/Z500/F... Block N5 - N8: inside contour N10/045 Block N9: move out of inside contour N11/000/X -2000/Y -1500/Z=0/F. Block Nil: withdrawal to starting position N12/M30 Cutter path plotted in one plane
  • 193. 5-G40/048 Exercise: Cutter radius 5 mm Incremental prcgrannin9 Starting from point Pi Absolute programming Determining the zero-point from point PI.
  • 194. 5-G40/G48 Example: Combined Inside-/Outside Contour Mode of programming: incremental Milling cutter radius 5 mm 25 50 35
  • 195. b-U4U/U411 Exercise: Program the example in absolute mode, - Zero point as in drawing. Cutter radius 5 mm F (L)(1) (H) remarks e Aftle■ AO in
  • 196. •G64 G64 - Switching Feed Motors Currentiess The previously programmed G- and M-codes remain stored. Switching currentless with program stored G64 is a pure switching function. it is not stored. °o°° N G XYZ F D,J K t+ i 718 9 4 5 6 1 2 3 1. Press key 64 M 2. When a number appears on the VDU, press keyLpE1.1 1NP HICl DEL M REV FWD until G-lamp flashes. I 3. Key in 64 4. Press key [INPL the feed motors are now currentless.
  • 197. 5.1512 G72 - Pocket Milling Cycle Pockets are a quite common shape when milling. The programming work of many single blocks can be put together to a cycle. The computer offers a fixed sequence r cycle. Programming G72 1. G72 2. X-value, inside dimension of the pocket in X-direction. 3. Y-value, inside dimension of the pocket in Y-direction. 4. Z-value = depth of pocket . F-value N., Format G72 N3/G72/ x .mom= c Ill N G 01.1” X W) (D) 0) Y ($) Z F (L) (T) (HI mo..0.. + 4/Z ± 5/F3 With this block the machine cannot mill a pocket yet. - It does not know the radius of the cutter and thus cannot, calculate the movements. - Therefore, the tool has tc be described in one of the previous blocks (MO6). The computer uses these data (cutter radius) to calculate the effective movements which were programmed last. -I f no M06 was programmed before, alarm sign lb will appear. L MP 4
  • 198. 5-G72 Pocket Milling Sequence The milling cutter has to be positionea before the pocket milling can start, NJ I. The cutter moves into the pocket by the Z-value, If a Z-movement is programmed 2. Milling out reaming) a pocket: - The first movement is in X-directich. -X +Y - The signs determine the sequence of the traverse. Overlap: • The overlap is 1/10 of the cutter radius (with 3 mm radius approx. 0,5 mm). The computer taxes the information about. the radius from the MOE block which was programmed last.
  • 199. Ot tae Finishing ram: The sides are. being finished.. Traverse 10/11/1.3. Finisning measu2:e approx. 1/1C of the. .:Litter radius. Rapid traverse Begin of cycle 4. Cutter moves out of pocket (Z-direction) into starting position. The pocket milling cycle is complete. End of cycle t Pockets can be prodrammea in absolute or incremental mode. Incremental programming: X,Y,Z values are given from the stlarting position. Technological tip When moving in a milling cutter the feed should be approx. halve of the normal cutting feed. Therefore it is advisable to program this first movement in an extra block. RJ179 R
  • 200. 5472 Summary G72 (M06) With Pocket in XY-plane N.../M06/D(X) : Data for calculation of cutter path .../G72/x. CD D X-value /Z C_ /Y /T(F)(::) /F Y-value X = Inside measurement of pocket 1406 D(X) /Z(II ) /S(Y) = Inside measurement of pocket = Cutter radius SCY) = Speed Z = Hz-value er'F) Z = Indeed depth = Tool number F = Feed The computer will calculate all reference points automatically. Example: .,- Cutter ciameter 10 mm Ihe pocket is programmed. incrementaL'Ly Start. position for cvc:a as in drawing. X NI (D) G iNt) N r 'f Z IS) 2000 Mob _Lil (K) too o -so. N:7) = Move to. start position NE = Tool data = Pocket milling cycle F Mg) OA)
  • 201. 30 25 Example: 20 o o N 0 Cutter diameter 8 mm Programming mode: incremental Example: Programming mode: absolute o Determine the zero point of the workpiece o 60 o Mill the pockets in two runs with twi, subroutines, if you know G27 already.
  • 202. G81/81 Boring. With. GOO and GO1 you can execute boring operations: 1. You program with 001 (feed at desired depth of bore 2. With rapid traverse you move to the starting point of the boring operation. The procedure is always the same one: - Boring with feed (G01) to length L Withdrawal by length L with GOO. Therefore these two movements are put together in one G-function (cycle), G81 - Boring Cycle Programming: N.../G81/Z t /F... - Under the Z-address you program the depth of bore. F-address: feed in mm/min The withdrawal is done automatically with GOO. GOO, G81 Application: Through holes with a riot too large depth of bore.
  • 203. .20Z/ G82 - Boring Cycle with Dwell If the depth of bore is reached, the withdrawal with G81 starts immediatel y (rapid• traverse). The bore chip is torn off. The surface at the base of the hole is nct clean. Therefore the drill bit remains in the programmed position Z. G04 GO1 GOO G82 Sequence 1. First movement: with feed 2. If depth of bore is reached, the drill bit turns without feed 0,5 seconds. Withdrawal in rapid traverse. Programming: N.../G82/Z± /F Application: Blind holes cf medium depth. g _itiVI 4
  • 204. G83/B3 G83 - Withdrawal Cycle it happens quite often with deep bores that the chips are not flowing out properly. - Therefore you have to withdraw the drill bi.t in order to take away the chips. You can program the operation with G01/GOO/G01/G00 etc. or with various G81 or G82 cycles. The drawing illustrates the principle, that a few cycles are again put together to a new cycle. 1. Step Chip discharge 2. Step Chip discharge - 3. Step Chip discharge etc. G 00 G 01 Gal G83
  • 205. 083/B4 Programming G83: The final depth of bore and the feed are to be programmed. Procedure: 1. Bore at 6 mm depth with feed 2. Withdrawal with rapid traverse (6 ram) 3. With rapid. traverse 5,5 mm and 6 mm feed 4. Go to starting point with rapid traverse 5. With rapid traverse 11 mm, with feed 6 mm etc. until you reach the programmed 2.value. Application: Deeper bores
  • 206. G811821831B5 Example: Pay attention to the technological data. Use drilling emulsion to protect the drill bit. Bores larger than 10 mm dia, need to be rough-drilled. Use 081, 082, G83.
  • 207. G85 G85 - Reaming Cycle In order to achieve bores with a high surface quality, reaming of bores is necessary. Using standard twist drill you may reach quality 11 to 12. For higher quality standards the bores have to be reamed. By reaming you reach quality 6. G85 is a combination of two G01 'commands. Programming: - Block number - G85 - Z-value - Feed F Feed Gal Feed GO1 G8S Note: • The depth of the bores to be reamed is indicated. in the technical drawing. The bore-length 25 has a tolerance measurement,
  • 208. G89 G 89 - Reaming Cycle with Dwell The sequence is the same as with G85. The reamer bit remains 0,5 seconds in the dead position if the programmed depth . is reached. Sequence GO1 G04 001 G85 Infeed with feed at length Z 0,5 seconds dwell Withdrawal with feed at length Z
  • 209. Chapter 6 Tools, tool lengths compensation, radius compensation of milling cutter Programming of tools Tool lengths compensation (principle) Working with various tools 1. Determining the tool sequence 2. Determination of tool data 2.1. Diameter, technological data 2.2. Detecting the tool length differences 3. Calculation of tool lengths 4. Tool lengths compensation in the program sequence 5. Tool lengths corrections Other cases for programming M06 Connection: Zero-point offset G92 Tool lengths compensation M06 Milling of chamfers Depth of bore with spiral drill Tool data sheets Tool sheets 6.1 6.3 6.5 6.7 6.7. 6.9 6.13 6.15 6.17-6.21 6.23 6.25 6.27-6.33 6.35
  • 210. The Programming of the Tools Tool magazines of industrial NC-machines are equipped with up to 50 or more tools. The sequence is programmed. Technological data and dimensions have to be programmed for each individual tool bit. Tools are programmed using the T-addxess. T stands for tool.
  • 211. Tool Lengths Compensation TO1 i`' T03 T02 y ma IC )411111111 . I gar Alaix AVIV _______ ..Ta= • •■■•. ..„,.--,L,..... '''r • •... ---.a.:. -;— . um Gila I ...... 7-TITTIT. E ..., 074 111111 : _a or EA It ...,4=a0 PC z; 1 Target 1 4 I Actual , rl 4. i I Actual 1 Z, Act. Position = Targ. Pos. Targ. Info = + HZ Targ. Info = —HZ TO1 IM06ID . /S. . . . /Hz = on-o1 I The computer is given information on the target position or desired position. 102 IM06/D /S. . . /Hz = + . 11021 T03 [M06/D .... .... /Hz = — . /T03 I Imagine the coordinate system transferred into the reference plane of the tool. The target position is described starting from the actual position.
  • 212. M0611 Working with various Tools Determining the toot sequence Detecting the tool data Compensation of tool lengths T1 'or the manufacture of a workpiece you often need different tools: drills, various milling cutters etc. The programmer needs to know various data such as - Kinds of tools - application of different tools, -. position of tools to each other T3 1. The milling cutters are of different diameters. These are known'to you. 2. The tools are of different lengths. These are not known to you. You have to measure the lengths and take them into consideration when programming. Otherwise you move the cutter in the air without chip removal or you run it into a workpiece (crash).
  • 213. M06/2 U Procedure 1. Determining the tool sequence Milling a slot with T2 Facing with T1 Milling a T--slot with T3 2. Determination of tool data 2.1. Diameter, technological data Entering the data 1. Stick the tools into the correSponding column. r 'D= . :d 7 2. Enter the technological data: d =, Cutter diameter D = Cutter radius F = Speed of feed t = Maximum depth of cut S = Speed 2 easier.
  • 214. M06/3 2.2. Detecting the Tool Length Differences (Hz) The differences in tool lengths nave tc be measured. The measurements can be taken using an external presetting device. In. many cases the measuring system within the CNC-machine is taken use of. You can scratch with all tools a reference surface or measure the data using a dial gauge. The difference is called Hz. Procedure Mount Tl reference tool) and scratch reference surface, set dial gauge respectively. Detection of data by scratching Detection of data with dial gauge. Scratching only when cutter is turning Set dial gauge when machine is at stand-still. Set dial gauge to 0. T1 T3 T2 T4 Press keyFaI4, the Z-value display is set to 0. ‘=17.1 N G XYZ F 00C13000 : d. D,J F 0 t s t HZ 0•.1R L,T M T
  • 215. M06/4 U Mount 12 Scratch surface Touch dial gauge with cutter until it shows 0. Read value from display. N G XYZ F 0003000 D,JK LT M 650 d ! Enter value into tool data sheet. In this way you determine all tool lengths. F t s HZ 0 Pay attention to the signs! 6 sc • +
  • 216. 3. Calculation of Tool Lengths (Tool lengths compensation) Since these data are known you could take the various lengths into consideration. This would, however, be quite confusing calculation work and will often lead to mistakes. Calculation of tool length M06 (Tool lengths compensation) (Programming) Format M6 N3/M06/D(X)5/S4/Z(Hz)±5/T(F)3 The data are entered into the pro g ramming sheet. N G (M) X (J) Y (D) (K) (9) Z F IL) (T) (H) T = tool number D = milling cutter radius S = spindle speed only for your information) Hz = difference in tool length faIMMKIINIIIIIIM 111111ENIMIIIIIIIMIMM •inmmommirm EMI= 131111 121111MMIE g ' MEM MIIIIII 111111111111M1111•11 2 coo 65 0 ■,. ME-ME ii•11111111111 Note: If you writ a number 1,2,3,4 under the F(T) address when programming M06, this automatically means program hold. If there is a 0 under the F(T) address, there will be no hold.
  • 217. Tool Lengths Compensation in the Program Sequence The first tool (T01) has a H z value = O. N.../M06/D2000/S1300/7,Hz) 0/T01 Manufactu;€1 Tool change T02. N.../M06/D500/S2000/Z(Hz) = 800/T02 [ tart First the tool T02 moves from the actual position to the target position. Then the manufacture itself starts.
  • 218. Tool Lengths Corrections You have finished the manufacture of a workpiece and find out that the Zmeasurement is not correct. - The grogram is correct - The starting position of the cutter is correct. What is the reason? The target value information {H z value) was not correct (wrong, inaccurate measurements, cutter not resharpened). Actual value Target value TARGET INFORMATION Hz wrong M06/D.../2.../2+ 12.43/T02 Reference line Z=1,43 zK =11 The target information Hz has to be corrected. Hzk = Corrected target information Hzk = Hz + correction value M06/1),../S.../Z+ 1100/T02 4{.11 Z)
  • 219. Example of a Correction of the Hz•value You may 1. Measure tool once again 2. Detect the correction value by measuring the workpiece. AZ = -1,35 The Hz information has to be correcvalue. ted by the - Imagine the coordinate system transferred to the Z-actual position of the workpiece. - Add the correction value 6, Z to the target information Hz of the tool bit. AZ = 1,35 Pay Hz 2: 15,4 -1,35 =14,05 attention: L Z may have t sign. Hzk = = = = Hz + (-G Z) 15.4 + (- AZ) 15.4 - 1.35 14,05 The value Hzk = 14,05 is corrected in the programming sheet, tool. data sheet and in the memory.
  • 220. Example Programmed Hz-value (actual informaticn): - 6,25 mm Workpiece measurements: Actual and target, compare drawing. Correct the Hz-value Hzk = Hz 1- ( t 2) Pay attention to the sign of Z. Z. Hzk = Example Hz of TO1 = 0 Hz of T02 = -4,32 Workpiece: Actual value TO1 = 10,5 mm Actual value T02 = 5,2 mm Target value TO1 = 10 mm Target value T02 = 6 mm Correct the Hz-values of TO1 and T02. TO1 Hzk j TO2
  • 221. Other Cases for Programming M06 i T.n i io NI G X OAF- ill (M) (J) (D) (K) Y (8) Z 0 H. iii (T ) F (I-) (H) If a G45, G46, G47, G48 or a G72 com mand (cutter radius compensation) is programmed, in one of the previous blocks a M06 has to be put in, otherwise the alarm sign will, appear. Ali: Cutter radius information missing The computer needs the cutter radius information D in order to calculate the compensated paths .(G45,G46,G47,G4'• The same applies with the pocket ing cycle G72. Alarm A16 Cutter radius information missing.
  • 222. Connection: G92 Zero-point offset M06 Tool lengths compensation M06 G92 The Hz-information is an incremental target information within an independent coordinate system. The origin of the coordinate system is determined with G92.
  • 223. Milling of Chamfers Chamfers are usually milled at an angle of 45°. The size of the chamfer is determined by the programmed. path and/or by the cutting contour. 1. Chamfer size determined by different cutter paths (different distances between cutter axis and workpiece edge) 2. Chamfer size determined by different infeed and Z-direction. The cutter path remains unchanged.
  • 224. Programming a Chamfer with Cutter Path unchanged The contour is milled with a cutter of (;) mm dia. To avoid the necessity to program a new cutter path for chamferring, the angle cutter shall be programmed in direction such that a chamfer lx1 mm is reached. Cutter path. - end mill - Cutter path - angle cutter How deep has the Angie Cutter to be fed in? The radius of the angle cutter which mills the inside contour of the chamfer: [- adius end mill/ R r Width of chamfer! With a mill. path using a 5 mm shank, dia. '3 mm, the radiJs 3f the angl e ter produces the chamfer ix45°. Angle cutter Mill path Width of chamfer
  • 225. Angle cutter, dia. 16 x 4 mm With a 45 0 angle cutter, the cutting radius changes by one mm if the cutter is fed in by 1 mm. Example Radius of mill path 5 mm 1. Cutter at height 0 Distance to workpiece = 1 mm 2.. Cutter fed in by 1 mm Radius 5 mm touches edge. 3. Cutter fed in by z mm Chamfer. 1x45° is produced. Measure of total depth! Measure until radius mi l path Width of chamfer (1 mm) 2 mm mm)
  • 226. Example Unchanged mill path - Radius end mill: 5,63 mm - Chamfer 0,67 x 0,67 mm With an infeed of 1,63 mm the angle cutter touches the contour. 1+ 0,63= 1,63 Infeed 1 mm Infeed 1,63 mm R5 R5,63 Radius- 6,3 mm produces the chamfer contour. 5,63 mm radius cutter path 0,67 mm width of chamfer 6,30 mm ,3 Cutter infeed 1,63+0,67= 2,3 5,63 0,67 mm 1,63 mm (radius touches contour) 0,67 mm (width of chamfer) 2,30 mm total infeed
  • 227. G81/0 The Depth of Bore with Spiral Drill Kind holes are dimensioned down to the fiat ground of the bcre. If you want 'co calculate the tool length you either scratch the surface with the point of the drill tit or you take measurement of the length of •the tool. In order to program the indicated depth of bore you nave to add the length of the tool point. H tg3O ° 2 H = tg30 0 x d 7 Chart Drill dia. in mm 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 • 11 (mm) 0.57 1.15 1.73 2.30 2.89 3.46 4.04 4.6/ Drill Data for the Tool Sheet Always deduct value H from the measured data when you enter it. You need not to calculate anymore and can program the dimensions of the drawing directly.
  • 228. Tool Data Sheet T1 T2 T3 T5 T4 T6 T7 T8 d D= F 2 t S HZ HZK d D F 1 S Hz Hzic Cutter dia. (mm) (mm) . . ... ....... Cutter radius (mm/min) Feed speed Max. milting depth (mm) Spindle speed (U/min) Difference measure (mm) Corrected difference measure (mm) Zero-point of workpiece Start position Tool change position Vertical axis system Horizontal axis system +t) Z +X 4, 4011.1111111111, Zero-point offset (G92) X mm Y mm Z mm Drawing no : Denomination: Workpiece material: Program no. Name: Date:
  • 229. LT it.. 7. ei,11::•_.._._.. ! 7 v • 1.':.i.). • N 771) • vi _ • r _ _--. 1 1 1 .. , ti 1_ - - !i . - 1 _i_ ------ ---. 'i,-(t ./
  • 231. Mi The M-Functions Miscellaneous or switching functions. MOO - Program Hold If you program MOO in a block, then the program will be interrupted. Continuation of the program: press Ffa1 key. When Do We Program MOO? - Tool change Take measurements Switch to hand operation Carry out corrections etc. M30 - Program End N X (iD) (K,S) F LT) 000 In the last block of a program you have to program M30. Otherwise the alarm sign A05 will appear. After M30 the program jumps automatically tc NOO. You can start anew. '120 tel3o If the ONC interface is mounted, M30 switches off the mair. spindle (M03 is cancelled).
  • 232. M2 M03 - Milling Spindle on (only with accessory DNC-Interface) M 03 The M03 instruction switches on the milling spindle. Switch the milling spindle on such that the motor has enough time to run up and that you are in position to set the right rpm. Important note M03 Before pushing the start key the main spindle switch has to be set to CNC-position. M05 - Milling Spindle Off (only with accessory DNC-Interface) Format M05 t When do we N3/M05 iTogram 1405? - Before a tool. change - Before taking measurements Note: M30 switches off the milling spindle too M06 switches off the milling spindle O. if T(F)
  • 233. M3 M06 - Tool Lengths Compensation Compare cnapter Tool LengthsCompensation M17 - Jump Back into Main Program Compare Subroutines M99 - Circle Parameter Compare Circle Programming M08, M09, M20, M21, M23, M26 are as switching functions not yet defined. with. them you could activate peripherical devices (under preparation!)
  • 234. Chapter 8 Input of Program, Corrections, Operation Survey What happens when data is put in? Input format Indication on the screen Input of program Operating elements CNC; Program input Option key hand operation — CNC operation The word indication The figure keys, the minus key The memory keylINPI The l -31 key Thei FWDIkey ThefREVIkey The( DELI key Input of M-values Take-over of registered values Inserting and deleting of blocks Deleting of a registered program Program Sequence Testrun Single block operation Automatic operation Interventions during program flow — Program stop -- Program hold 8.1 8.2-8.3 8.4 8.5 8.6-8.7 8.9 8.9 8.10 8.12 8.13 8.14 8.15 8.16 8.17 8.18 8.19 8.20 8.21 8.23 8.25 8.26-8.27 8.29 8.31-8.33
  • 235. Input of Program Corrections Operation The knobs, displays, symbols, etc. will confuse you in the beginning. So first put in the very simple programs and check the various function -keys. In half an hour you will be accustomed to them.
  • 236. S u ry e y Data Input, Correction, Delete Storing a word Sequence of Program Testrun: Inching through the program FITTj Take over of values Single block operation Correcting a word Put in P24]-4. v alue 7 + ••--• M-programming (first number key) Press g Automatic operation Searching a word Searching a block FWD iSTAR1 Influencing the Program riR8C71 Inserting a block ;Aal + riNiq Deleting a block + ;DEL] Termination [INP1 +IRE A In terruption + IFWDi Deleting a program (DELI + (MP' (first DEL) set Storing of Program I program to NOO IINPi + 'TZTV Compare tape operation RS-232 C operation with N
  • 237. What happens when Data is put in? We put in GO!. Secretary iinterface element) reports to director: Somebody wants G01! , • 4. The director instructs the memory operating program (RAM = Random access memory): Rememher G011 • _ Nod.1 Director CPU = Central Processing Unit = Microprocessor) asks his specialists: 5. The memory reports to the director: 0.k,,, I have noted it down! Can we execute GOI? • 3. The specialists (EPROM = Programmable read-only memory) think and inform the director: Yes we can1 R 6. Director instructs his press-speaker (output element): Show them out there, that we are clear with GOl. We have everything understood and are ready for further inputs!
  • 238. Data input What happens when Data is put in? Digital read-out Data Input Interface element (secretary) Central processing unit = Microprocessor (Director) Operating program = EPROMS (Specialists) Memory = RAM Output element (press speaker)
  • 239. The Block Format or Input Format According to the key number (G-, M--functions) you have to put in the required information. The computer will ask these informations. X G we— 1111 (M) (0) (.1) migrimmo_p F rift INP IMEM51.11111 Example: If you press INP after the G90 input, the indication jumps to the next block. number. 04 N 00 04 G (M) X (4 Y (0) (K) (S) Z F (L) (T) (H) BEEMIllin MI IM Example: You have entered the X,Y-values with GOO. After the registration of the Yvalue the indication jumps to the next block number. Why? The computer knows polate only in two of X- and Y-values automatically to 0 programming). G (M) X (J) (0) N G (M) 00 DO {J) C Z Lloo 0 00 .Y (k) (S) X (0) Y (X) (S) D c===p Z F (L) (1) (H) 111.1 IIIIII F (L) (T) (H) C=J-------- that it can interplanes. After input it sets the Z-value (with incremental Example: If you, however, have programmed the X-value with zero, the computer will ask for a Z-value. Example: With absolute programming mode the computer asks all three values X,Y,Z. You have to tell the computer the plane from which it has to start the movements. fl A
  • 240. Indication on the Screen Mode of operation absolute - incremental: CNC OPERATION INIGI XI INCR. VI z IF! 1. When switching on the CNC-operation the control is in incremental operating mode. 2. If you program G90 or G92 the screen shows the absolute operating mode. 3. If you program G25 or G27 the display disappears. The computer recognizes this only in the program run. CNC OPERATION ABS. INIGI x I Y i Z IF Mode of operation metric - inch: According to the position of the option switch the metric or inch mode of opera- tion will be indicated. Metric 0,01 mm Inch 0,001 CNC OPERATION ABS.0.01MM1 NIG' x! Yi Z!Fl Vertical or horizontal axis system _L Vertical Horizontal These symbols indicate which axis system is in operation.
  • 241. Input of program 30o Example X N Start 30oo 0 QO -04 DO 02 Program end (Kt J) (DS V 5 2 (UT (I-s) 0 0 Mao 0 0 --1 —Zoo() ;41 1. Switch on main switch T1F Control lamp for current supply and lamp for mode of l• 71: operation hand-operation are on, EE N G XYZ F H/C o Kg) L 23 ACC mm /mm. N G XYZ F O 0CLIDOO r 2. Press key 0001:000 D,J K LT M 00 D.J K jo LJ M h/C The control unit is switched over to CNC-mode of operataon. On the digital read-out the lamp of address N is on. 00 (NOO) is shown. CNC OPERATION N G IL GO 01 I X The screen shows N Y 09.1 1 3. Press key!INP N G XYZ F O 0CLIDOO D,J K L;T 1NP M /Mb 0 N G XYZ •F O 000 D,J K LX M 00 N G X YZ F 1NP O 0=000 0,J K LT M CNC OPERATION N!GjX1Y • 00L____! : 01! CNC OPERATION 4. Put in G-information 0 N 001-071, 011 0 00 shows on the digital read- out. CNC OPERATION NG 00 Oa 01 With INPIyou instruct the computer to register NOO. The address letter jumps to G. XIV' I 5. Press keyIINPl Address inilcation jumps to X.
  • 242. N G XYZ F CNc OPERATION 00CCD00 D,J K t:r M i i 3 0 10 01 30001 N G XYZ 1 F r---.. F Z :N G 00i 00 : Oil 0 N GXYZ F 0 0 CCD 0 0 D.J K LX M • ! X i 0 N • G , XI 001 001 30001 I LTI 1 ! N G XYZ F DJ K NIG X : 00! 00 30001 ., at: — 8. Put in y -value 1.0. • .. 9. Press IINP! Display jumps CNC OPERATION 00CCDOO 13' M L_. O N G XYZ 1NP ....0:. , CNC OPERATION I 111P 4 / INP!. Display jumps : Y 3000i : Press to Y. : CNC OPERATION 0 0 : CCD 0 0 DJ K S M 0 01[ . 7. Y; : 001 00; 3000i I G XY 6. Put in X-value 130001. :Y X ! •N;G: , N X CNC OPERATION 0 0 D.J K 0 0 CEOLT M 1NP 00:. 0099_91, C! N.OL :, F 00CCDOO D,J K L • LT M 0 ! i Y;z OF 1 • . Z. tO V L Z 0 1, _..._0I CN C OPERATION N,G: x 00i oo. 3000, Y 0 Put in Z-value D. 11. Press 0101. Block NO0 is entered. Block indication jumps to N01. 12. Enter block NOl ' in the same way. Put in the Minus sign after the number value. • 13, M30 (rogram end) M 3 N G XYZ F Co 0 CliD 0 0 D.J K LX 30' CNC: OPERATION Y! 0! 00101 0 01 03E1 START TART I Put in NO2 - Display is at G. - Press key 0 then the Maddress is indicated. - Put in the figure value. - Press IINPI. - .NIGI X 1 ! 00 001 30001 1 14. Press keyISTARTI, Display jumps to NO0 (only if M30 is programmed). 15. Press key START gram runs. the pro-
  • 243. Operating Elements - CNC Program Input Option Key Hand-Operation/CNC-Operation H/C 0003000 ch..} K N G XYZ F 0 DEL REV F By pressing key FWD H/C the mode of operation changes from hand-operation to CNC-, operation. The relative mode of operation is indicated by the lamps 2 0 (CNC-operation) or (hand-operation). To put in a program it has to be switched to CNC-operation. In the CNC-mode of operation you cannot move the slides by hand anymore.
  • 244. The Word Indication The lamps and light bars of the word indication show you which data you can put in. Digital read-out Monitor The actual words are indicated by lamps The actual words are indicated by a light bar. N G XYZ F 0 0 CCD 0 0 CNC - OPERATION N G; X 1 00 01 Y Address indication G, M function If depends on G or M-functions which addresses and/or data are required? E.g. M06 M06 requires a D,S,Z,T information. Digital read-out Monitor The X-indication is also valid for the D-value, the Y-indication for the S-value and the F-indication for the Tvalue if M06 was programmed. The address letter D,S,T are indicated. OPERATION N G 1 00 • 01 02 031,4060 X Y F
  • 245. The Indication of Addresses D, J, K, L, M on the Screen CNC OPERATION NLG X! G25/G27 `/H ZIFI The address letter L is indicated. (L = jump address, subroutine address) Format MO6 CNC OPERATION INIGI X . Y Addresses - D (milling cutter radius) - S (spindle speed) - T (tool number) axe indicated. Format M99 Addresses - J (start of arc of circle) - K (end of arc of circle) are indicated. NG 0 0 Attention: X,Y,F lamps ' are valid for various addresses.
  • 246. The Figure Keys You use the figure keys in order to enter the various values for address letters X,Y,Z,F,G,M,D,T,L,J,K. The entered values appear on the digital read-out and/or on the screen of the monitor. Fr] H. - The Minus-Sign Key ID N G XYZ F O 0=000 D,J K L.J 1 ° 9 I NP H/C 6 DEL M 2 3 REV 65 FWD 0 1,4j R1 X,Y,Z values can have a minus or a plus sign. Pius sign input for X, Y, Z: Put in figures only. N G XYZ F O 0CCIDOO K LX M 1400 0 H/C Minus sign input After input of figures, press EL] key. The minus sign appears as a bar on the digital read-out. M Example: tit X = -1400 Input: Ly4 PEI
  • 247. The fistiiiKey = Memory Key ]INP! = Abbreviation for . Input LIN = Instruction to the computer to register the entered value. N G XYZ F 0003)00 D.J K L,T M 1 89 4 5 6 1 2 3 — 0 -4- Digital read-out N G XYZ F r DEL REV FWD FTAPT Example 23501 - Entex value12350 The number appears for your information only, it is not in the computer yet. 00CICI►OO K M 718 9I TWP-1 Monitor CNC OPERATION K L,T M N G XYZ F d IINP Lamp X lights up. 0001:11D00 L I o H/C - You press INP. By pressing this key, figures are registered; at the same time the number 2350 disappears and the light jumps to the next address letter. M Note With1INPi you can also jump forward in the block. , N G _x_ Y 235000I 01!
  • 248. The Key Instruction: to jump forward within one block 0003000 M N G XYZ F '4W7 III; 0 5 5 IN 700 ro aar.. rnrn In. n. F D,J K L3 0 H/C 111 'CIART the program will By pressing the key /-10 jump to the next word. The entered value of the next word will appear on the digital read-out(Permanent function when you keep on pressing the key) 0 .1 A
  • 249. The FWD Key Instruction: to jump forward block-by-block N G XYZ F 000137300 Mw 0 D.J K LT M :s3r, -5 ).743 I r,-1] 0 111111E111 NEI X (J) (D) (K) y (S) (L) (T) (H) 1. A given word is displayed. By pressing the IFWD1 key the program jumps to the next block numher. 2. If a block number is indicated: when pressing the FIE key the program jumps to the next block number. F (L) (H) 3. If you keep the iniD key pressed down, the program will jump block-by-block to the program end.
  • 250. The 1:1E■ii Key Instruction: to jump back in program blocky-by-block 7+ — i/1/- r-T-7n 7 8 9j 11NP 4 5 6 DEL 1 2 3 REV FWD 0 .1- tzl Function: 1. A given word is on the display. If you press key iREVI the program jumps to block number N. X (J) ;01 (K) (L.) Mill) (S) 2. If block number N is indicated and you press keyiREVI, then the program will jump to the previous block number. N (M) (J) (D) (K) (S) z (l)(T) (HI 3. If you keep the W.Ol key pressed the block number jumps back to NCO (permanent function).
  • 251. The DEL Key = Delete key, correction key DEL is the abbreviation of delete, which means to cancel, to extinguish. N G XYZ F O 0 CCD 0 0 D,J K LT M O ••■••••■•• Ito H/C You can delete only the value of the address letter which is indicated. If you correct a X-value e.g., the address letter X has to be on the digital readout. DEL Attention: REV FWD START With IDELIonly the digital read-out is cancelled, not the value in the register. You must put in a new value and store it with [INPJ. N G x Y2 F O 0 CED 0 0 D,J K LT m 520 0 HIC [+1 r Example: You want to change value X from 520 to 250. 1. Press DELI key, the value 52C will disappear. N G XYZ F O 000 D,J K tT m L 250 2. Put in the correct value (250). H/C r 3. key, value X is registered; light jumps to the next address letter. PresslINPI
  • 252. Input of M-Values 0 If you want to put in M-values: at first you have to select the M-key. The M--value is programmed in the G-column. L_J r N G XYZ F 00CCD00 D,J K LT m 3 0 Input: M30 Address G has to be shown INP 4 5 N Monitor Example Digital read-out 6 DFL H/C M G XYZ F N G: X 00 Press P,T Put in 0 0 OM 0 0 CNC OPERATIONS ill 30 0 CNC OPERATION D,J K LT M •• N;G: X Press IINT] (register) , oo( H/C 14 M3^i Attention: ▪ M-values are not taken over by pressing INP -i- If you press INP after M30, the program jumps back to NOO. A 1S Y
  • 253. Take-Over of registered Values into the following Blocks By pressing [INPIthe register takes over the previously entered value of the relative word column. N G {M) rr 00 X (J) (D) 2000 Y (K) (S) 300o 0 0 04 02 03 F (L)(T)(H) Z -4000 Example 1 - G--address is shown INPS - G-value flashes shortly and Is registered - Word indication jumps forward INP r N G (M) X (J) )D) (K) (S) 00 00 2. oo 30oo 01 00 0 0.Z 04 200o F (L)(T)(H) • 0 0 0 000 Z . - -70-Ei 4 goo 0 04 INP - - Example 2 - You want to put in the value Z=0 in block NO3, - You happen to see that the Z-value in block NO1 should he -1000 and correct the value. - After correction you carry on with the Z-value input of block NO3. - If you press!INP[the register takes over the previously entered Z-value, i.e. -1000. Attention: M-values and inputs are not taken over with IINP1
  • 254. Inserting and Deleting of Blocks N G XYZ F yil4- -nserting a block ;,_7J Deleting a block 0001:000 K CC 1.7 rk.. 1 mmm.m. 7 8 12 45 i H 1 .— . --170 ,INPi !0- 63 ! Remark 1: First press key viand (keep1,--, !pressed). Remark 2: Perranent function when you carry on pressing (more than 0,6 sec.), i.e. you insert permanently empty Ilnes •.A74Ch I ,REV .1; 0 }L °f then key INPI ids R G21. N G XYZ F Example: Inserting 0 0 CUD 0 0 D,J K L;T M + Digital read-out shows block a02 02 M IIIIII • all TM (J) X (D) 0 00 00 4 MEI 04 ga 0 00 03 r 00 01 2 01 o 2. 0 F (L) CT) (H) Z 0 0 o o 400 400 0 0 ►► r = 2.5o 0t 0 • .0 loo 0 0 400 C1 ►o OS 3o 00 00 04 04 0 0 Press FITTIT1 + In block NO2, G21 is automatically written. + The original block NO2 is automatically changed over to NO3 - also all subseauent blocks to the next block number. + In block NO2 you can program required instructions as you want. Procedure 0 01 [INP1 1 0 26-0 03 04 0 1500 0 ► IN + Delete G21 + Put in wanted bleCK Do 0 0 0 - do 400 Example: Deleting IDEL] + Digital read-out shows NO2 Press!,-.../14DELI NO2 is deleted All subsequent blocks are backnumaered: NO3 - NO2, N04 - NO3, etc'.
  • 255. Deleting of a registered Program Possibility 1 N G XYZ F 00C1CDOO D,J K L,T Switch off main switch. o Possibility 2 Press emergency stop button. r 1START Procedure N G XYZ F 00CCIDOO D.J I Possibility 3 A certain block number is indicated (NOO, N01, NO2 ...). M 00 First press key mains pressed). IDEL1 then IINI D 1 (DEL re- The registered program is deleted. The digital read-out shows NOO.
  • 256. The Program Sequence 1. Testrun The program runs in the computer. There are no instructions given for slide movements. 2. Single-block operation The program is worked off block by block. The slides move as programmed. 3. Automatic operation The total program is worked off. Switching instructions are carried out.
  • 257. 1) Testrun The program runs in the mind. The instructions for slide movements are not given. Purpose of the testrun: - Block mistakes are shown. - With absolute programming mistakes of the linear or circular interpolation are indicated (e.g. if you programmed movement in 3 planes simultaneously or you determined the target point of the quadrant uncorrectly, etc.). If you have programmed subroutines or jump instructions you can check the order of the instructions. Activation of testrun: 1. CNC-operation 2. Indication has to be on N-address 00 00 0 00 2400 01 02 MOE, D Coo 03 t 2 o 3. Press 1I-key: the indicated block is worked off. Soo 4. Press Ej-key: The following block is worked off. etc.
  • 258. 2) Single block operation In the testrun you do not see whether you run with e.g. GOO into the workpiece or whether i directions are correct. This you see in the single block- or in the automatic operation. Example: 1. Block N000 - Block indication is at N000. 1 Press key 1, then key START (key 1 has to remain pressed). Block N000 is worked off. 1 The screen shows dwell in block N001. 2. Block N001 Press again rs1ART1. Block N001 is worked off. The screen shows dwell in block NO02. In this way the program can run in single block operation.
  • 259. Single block operation (continued) Various blocks In single block operation: If you e.g. press keys DI+ rSTAR'Il there will be 3 blocks worked off. You can work off up to 9 blocks in one go(0 1..START1) Dwell in single block operation +1FWDI. Press The slides stop. If you pressLSTART the program continues. Interruption of program Press 4111)1 I REvi The program jumps back to N000.
  • 260. 3) Automatic operation G (M) X (J) (D) Y (K) (S) 2 - Set block indication to N000. Possibilit 1 01 (Is . • . zit la11. El MIMI NM mo 11111111. OEM 30 Press 1 12E 111 key, until NO00 is indicated. Possibility 2 Display shows any given block number. Press 'INF' IAREM, indication jumps to NOO. - Press key [STARTI. The program runs until a hold or until M30. To continue program after hold Press key !START Program Hold - Programmed hold MOO. - In connection with M06, if under the address T (F) a number 1. to 499 is programmed (with inch operating mode 1 to 199). If under T=O is programmed, there is no hold.
  • 261. Interventions during Program Flow 1. Program stop 2. Programm interruption 1. Program stop INP - P.0. The program jumps Press keys [El— 1-1-PI back to NOO (start). Pay attention: If you press 171key after 5114 the program starts with NOO. Your tool is not in starting position! Collision! New start: Measures Position the tool in program start position. Sonst Kollisionsgefahr and falscher Programmablauf
  • 262. 2. Program Interruption INP1 iFC61D The program is stopped. 00CED00 p N G X YZ F To continue program: .JK LT m Press key LS TART1. 0 ■••■••■• Why program interruption? INP DEL tit FWD You may e.g. - change the feed - take measurements - switch over to hand operation and carry out a correction by hand correct program, etc. Effectiveness of Corrections with Program Interruption LINP /r [F WDi 1. Corrections of feed: Feed corrections become effective in the interrupted block.' 2. Corrections of G,M,X,Y,Z-values in the interrupted block are only effective in the following program run. 3. Corrections of G,M,X,Y,Z-values in subsequent blocks will be effective when the program is continued.
  • 263. 9. ALARM SIGNS 9.1 • Purpose of alarm signs 9.2 • Procedure in the computer when input is wrong 9.4 • Alarm survey, possible inputs • Measure when alarm sign appears 9.5 9.7 9.15 • Alarm signs, details
  • 264. A5: M30 instruction missing WithiSTARTithe computer checks if M30 (program end) was programmed. A6: M03 instruction missing (M03 main spindle ON) This alarm only appears if threading cycles are programmed. Attention: The main spindle switch has to be in CNC-position! A08 A09 A10 All Al2 A14 Compare tape operation A13: inch/mm or vertical/horizontal switch with full program memory This alarm cannot be cancelled by [INPJ IEV/ , You have to switch back into the original position. If you nave put in a vertical mill program with switch position at horizontal mill, you have to enter the program new (with correct switch position. A15: Wrong V-value For admissible data see chart.
  • 265. A-16—A17 A16: Cutter radius data missing If a G72,G45,G46,047,G48 instruction is called, there has to be programmed a MO6 information with cutter radius data (D) in one of the previous blocks. Without this information the computer cannot calculate the center point path, A17: Wrong subroutine If a subroutine is nested more than 5 times, an alarm is shown. A18: Movement of cutter radius compensation smaller 0 Example: substract cutter radius once :446 G46 GOO/X3000/Y=0/Z=0 Cutter moves 30 minus 5 = 25 mm M06/D500/5..../ G46 GOO/X500/Y=-0/Z=0 No movement Cutter radius = traverse movement M06/0500/S.... G46 GOO/X300/Y=0/Z=0 Aiarm Movement X= 300 is smaller than cutter radius. 300 minus 500 = -200.
  • 266. A17 Special case — Alarm Al 8 with pocketing The first measure for the pocket has to be larger or equal. Cutter dia + 0,1 cutter dia. Example: Cutter dia. 10 mm Minimum measure for pocket d+0,1 0,1 10 + 0,1 x 10 10,1 mm Reason: Finishing cut 2 x 0,1 R (radius) is fixed. in cycle G72. 01xR
  • 267. Alarm/Measures Alarm Signs Purpose of alarm signs: If you put in and store data which the computer does not know, if you forget something or program a wrong block, then the computer gives an alarm sign.: The alarm sign appears on the digital read-out in form of a certain alarm number, on the monitor you get a commentary too. N G XYZ F 0 0 CED 0 CO D,J K M AL 01 CNC-OPERATION INIGI X ViZ !Fx A01 WRONG G/M INSTRUCTION
  • 268. Data Input, What happens when wrong data is put in — Alarm sign We put in a X-value 50000, i.e. for the cross slide a traverse path of 500 mm. 1. The secretary (interface element) reports: They want X = 50000! 2. The director (central processing unit, microprocessor) asks his specialists: Can we execute X = 50000? 3. The specialists (operating program) answer: No, Mister Director! X 50000 is too high! 4. The director instructs his speaker (output. element): Tell them out there, we cannot do it! X 50000 is too high, put in alarm sigp A02!
  • 269. Data input What happens when wrong Data is put in? Data on digital read-out Data Input: Central processing unit = Microprocessor (Director) Operating program = EPROM (specialists) Output element (Press. Speaker)
  • 270. Alarm-survey, inputs Alarm Signs (Survey) A00: Wrong G/M instruction A8: Tape end with tape operation SAVE A01: Wrong radius/M99 A9: Program not. found A02: Wrong X-value A10: Writing protection active A03: Wrong F-value All: Loading mistake A04: Wrong Z-value Al2: Checking mistake A5: A6: M03 instruction missing A7: A13: Inch/mm switching with full program memory M30 instruction missing No significance A14: Wrong mill head position/path unit with LOAD 1. /M or ---1 /M A15: Wrong Y-value A16: Cutter radius data missing A17: Wrong subroutine Ale: Movement cutter radius compensation smaller 0 Possible Inputs (otherwise alarms possible) Inch Metric Values Values Fineness (inch) Fineness .(mm) XD 0-19999 1/100 mm 0-7999 1/1000 Xrd 0-9999 1/100 mm 0-3999 1/1000 YV 0-9999 1/100 mm 0-3999 1/1000 YH 0-19999 1/100 mm 0-7999 1/1000 0-7999 1/1000 A_ ZVH 0-19999 1/100 mm Radii 0-9999 1/100 mm 0-3999 1/1000 D(X) milling cutter radius with M06 0-9999 1/100 mm 0-3999 1/1000 F 2-499 mm/min 2-199 1/10/min T(F) tool address M06 .0-499 0-199 1 1 L(F) jump instruotion: G27 0-221 H(F) exit signs M26 0-299 J/K circular parameter 0-90
  • 271. Alarm/Measures Measures when Alarm appears Alarm is on REV 1NP Alarm indication disappears DEL Cancel wrong value Put in correct value INP Store Note: - Alarm A13 can be cancelled only by operating the option switch metric/inch, horizontal/vertical. - Alarm sign of tape operation please compare chapter tape operation.
  • 272. A00—A01 A00: Wrong G/M instruction Example: G12, M55 A01: Wrong radius/M99 +Y X.1000 Y.1500 Possibility 1: Radius larger than admissible values Possibility 2: Wrong value for end coordinates PE of quarter arc Example: incremental value programming N.,./G02/X1000/Y1500/ Coordinates X=1000/Y=1500 cannot be end coordinate of quarter arc. Example: absolute value programming N 00 11 4 X 90 01 02 M30 Y 3000 4000 G 2000 1000 Z 0 30 1 F 100 100 I Alarm - In block NO1 point P1 is programmed. - In block NO2 the quarter aro is programmed (coordinate P2). The X,Y values are correct. The Z-value would mean a circular interpolation in space (helix). This the computer does not know. The not but tic alarm sign in this example does appear when the program is put in is on during the test run, automaor single block operation. Explanation: At programinput the computer just checks the contents of one block, it does not check the Z-value of the previous block.
  • 273. A02—A04 A2: Wrong X-value Compare chart for admissible values, A3: Wrong F-value Compare chart for admissible values. A4: Wrong Z-value Possibility 1: Admissible Z-value surpassed (compare chart) Possibility 2: Threedimensional movement with absolute value programming This alarm appears only in the test run, single block or automatic operation because the mistake cannot be recognized at program input (computer does not check contents of previous blocks at program input). Example: 0 11 10 . 1 1 , , 90 L 00 00 x 0 E 3000 , Y 1500 0 z F 300 (0) Alarm Monitor shows: Wrong Z-value; the computer accepts the - X,Y values since it can carry out this interpolation and indicates the value shown last as being wrong value. Attention: Maybe you wanted to program Z=0 and Y1500 instead of 0. The computer cannot know this. The computer indicates Z as wrong value since it does not know your thoughts.
  • 275. Magnetic tape operation Magnetic Tape Operation The ta p e enables you to store programs and to feed them into the computer memory. 1. Storing on tape To transmit from computer memory to tape: We call this mode of operation SAVE or CHECK. 2. From tape into computer To transmit the program from tape into the commuter memory: We call this mode of operation LOAD. Some data - n.:mory capacity pet tape side: approx. 400 blocks. - Operation time per tape side: approx. 90 sec. Operation advice 1. only cassettes . Erase: new cassettes completely (see • page 7.23). The test impulse from the final control o!1' the producer can cause Alarm All or Al2. 3. Main drive motor must not run during LOAD, CHECK, SAVE and ERASE operation. 4. Do not put down tape near main motor.
  • 276. Modes of operation SAVE/CHECK Magnetic Tape Operation Transmission of a program from machine memory to magnetic tape Mode of operation SAVE = transmit from machine memory to magnetic tape CHECK = control of transmitted (loaded) program 1. Press key[- ► iuntil word indication G lights up. Press key DELl. The indicated value disappears from the digital read-out. 2. Put in G65. Press keys Cry INP. -On the read-out you see C indicated.LL magnetic cassette tape operation. 3. Press keyriTs7F4 On the read-out appears 51 TILL' j 4. Put in program number. You can put in figures 000 099 co - 09 o - 999 The sequence of the figures can be chosen as you like. Example for input of a program with number 76: Press keys 5. Press key LINPI. The transmission / loading starts. 5.1. First free space on the tape is sought. If there are not data on the tape, it will advance approx. 4 seconds and rewind approx. 2 seconds. Band without data on: 4 sec. advance 2 sec. rewind' -4Tape begin Tape end Transmission SAVE
  • 277. Modes of operation SAVE/CHECK If there are already data,programs loaded on the tape, then the tape will advance to the end of the program which was loaded last. Then adv. ance 4 seconds and rewind 2 seconds. pro-rams a:ready 4 sec. advance 2 sec. rewind 2 sec. Program 2 2 sec. 1 ,''' .7 Pro g ram j Tape begin Transmission SAVE 3.2. Transmission operation SAVE The digital read-out indicates C ,A SA is the abbreviation for ZAVE. The program/data are saved from the machine memory - where they could be deleted - onto the tape. 5.3. At the end of the transmission o p eration the ta p e rewinds tc the tape start. 5.4. Control o p eration CHECK Cj L L HJJJ The digital read-out indicates C The data in the machine memor y are compared with the data loaded on the tape. If you have already programs loaded on the tape, then the digital read-out will indicate these on the read-out whilst the tape advances. It will advance to the program loaded last and then the CHECK will be carried out. CHECK of loaded program 0-Program 3 L1 Program 2 Ff Program L !C • 3 2; G 1 1Y,! 6. After CHECK the tape rewinds. The program is loaded on the tape. Please never take out tape during operation!
  • 278. Mode of operation LOAD Transmission of program from tape to machine memory Mode of operation LOAD 1. Press key [-1►1 until word indication G lights up. If a figure of the 6-function appears, press key DEL. Then indication on read-cut disappears. 2. Put in 065. Press keys EcIE INP . Read-out indicates ir- 1 1 3. Press key INP. Read-out indicates 4. Put in number of program. E.g. for program number 76 you press keys 1777iL On read-out; Lc 1 PL. 6: 5. Press keylINPI. 5.1. The program number CC is looked for. If you have other programs on the tape already, then these numbers appear on the digital read-out. E.g. IC P:214 or [c [715 5.2. Loading: When the wanted program 76 is found, the loading operation starts. On the digital read-out you see TE] LO is the abbreviation for load. 5.3. After the loading is done, the tape rewinds. The read-out shows NOO. Program number 76 is stored in the machine computer. 6. If you press keyISTART) then the program starts operating. Program 76 1 Program 75 _LT- Program 74. j Tape begin rrET 0 P 7151 is L7 P„.._, 1_ 4
  • 279. Summary From machine to tape From tape to machine SAVE, CHECK LOAD 1. Put. in C, 65 r , I. P-- in G65 • Press ITi,ii 1 Li Press rINP! 3. Press rP-Ticj . q ii.F...L ;1 l I P i :177, 5. Press INP Program is sought and will be loaded in machine. r---T ,i iC1 ,c 1 ± LP i .L__.; Ls1 i__L__:_i 5. Press [INPI - Free space on tape is sought. - Machine program is transmitted/ loaded on tape (SAVE) Io j IC - iSIAI If program is loaded in machine, then read-out indicates: N • lc HI 1 If operation is through, dication on read-out: then in- N • • oo____J Program can be started. 6. j Loaded program on tape is checked, compared with machine program. I 6. --7-1 Put in program number Put in program number g !-, ..1.1.: . t___,_i 2. Pressi 4. • 6 If-i L. 1c i r, r-T---m- i 1, io 0
  • 280. Alarm sign Alarm Signs — Tape Operation (Summary) A08 - Tap e end reached during loading of program from machine memory to tape only with node of operation SAVE) A09 - Selected program cannot be found (mode of operation LOAD). Tape is full. M06 is not put in in selected program (mode of operation LOAD). Alo - Writing protection active All - Loading mistake Al2 - Checking mistake General When switching off machine (also when current breaks down) an Interference pulse is put onto the tape. This interference pulse does not have any effect since the loading start only after 2 seconds ct ta p e advance. Thus: Tape has to be rewind (automatically). Never cake tape out during rewind operation. Tape cegin 7 First program starts after 2 seconds, Empty space, interTerence pulses ineffective.
  • 281. Alarm sign A08 Alarm sign A08: Only when using mode of operation SAVE! Reason Measures Tape finish during loading (SAVE) from machine memory to tape. (A08 only when using mode SAVE) - Press FEEY and REV Alarm sign A08 appears on digital read- Tape rewinds to tape begin. Digital read-out indicates N00. - Put in new tape and repeat loading operation. out. Program length 7t j Tape begin Tape end Attention: If you put in this tape and want to load the next finished program transmit from tape to machine memory) A09 appears No program end found!
  • 282. Alarm sign Auti Alarm sign A09: Only when using mode of operation LOAD! A09 - Reason 1 Measures Selected program not found. If you call a non-existing program number when loading ;from ta p e to machine memory), then alarm A09 appears. - PressiINP + 1REvl The tape rewinds. The digital read-cut indicates after chat NOO. - Look for program on another tape (in case you are sure you put it in). Example: You Look. on this tape for prcno. n Pr.NrhE. A09 - Reason 2 Measures Selected progran not fully on ta p e (m06), since tape was finished when loading from machine memory to tape (already in mode o!f operation SAVE you had alarm A06). - Press [INP1 +Fa] Tape rewinds, read-out indicates NOC, - Look for program on other tape (in case you are sure that you put it in; Example: You call. on program no.19 Program do es not nave M06, thus alarm AOb was indicated aiready during mode of operation SAVE. [ 19 IA 17 16
  • 283. Alarm sign Al 0 Alarm sign Al 1 A10 - Writing protection active: Only when using mode of operation SAVE and ERASE! (A-11 , If you remove the writing protection (i.e. the black caps) you cannot put any more data cn this tape side. crA*; Measures: If you put in such a tape side and you want to transmit a nrogram from the machine memory to the !ape, alarm PressLTN +LREV1 Tape rewinds, put ii other tape or mount. writing protection again, sign Alo appears. Al 1 - Load mistake: Only when using mode of operation LOAD! All - Reason 1 All - Reason 2 Motor is switched on or is being switched on during lading (cape-machine). The . program on the tape was not destroyed by switching on the motor. c_'estrc,,yed. The The program on the tape reasons for it could be a mechanical fault on the tape, a power failure - or the machine was switched off when tape was not rewound. Measures Measures - Switch off motor - Press FUTP + REvj Transmit program t.d new tape. The tape rewinds, the read-out indi- cates NOO. - Repeat loading operation. - If you have All indicated also with the following loading operation, please see reason 2. Summary measures ALARM All Repeat loading N•1 ,,JI,Arm All Alarm All Reason was interference when loading Reason was mistake ,„7,n tan€
  • 284. Alarm sign Al 2 Al2 - Check mistake: Only when using mode of operation CHECK/SAVE! Possible reasons: - Tape faulty - Interference p ulse: main mGtor: switc.hed on, short power failure, interference poise from electrial cond ...:.ctor flghtfling, switching on of soldering transformer The interference pulses can happen both when using mode of oberatIons SAVE or CHECK. Alarm sign Al2 in mode of operation SAVE - Remedy Store program under another number. Explanation: Measure: You cannot delete the false program just by its own. Thus you have to give to this program a new number, if you store in on the same tape. If you would . use the same program number, then alarm All would appear when loading (tape - machine) since only the first one of two identical program numbers can be called on. ,1+ ri5571 - Put iniETT out shows NOO. tape rewinds, read- - Put in same program under a new number. - If alarm Al2 appears again, then tape is defective. Interference during SAVE 17 Same program has to be put in under new program number. •
  • 285. Alarm sign Al2 Alarm sign Al2 in mode of operation CHECK During CHECK operation there may occur an interference impulse and alarm sign .Al: will be indicated, without a defective tape being the reason. Check: - Press INP + Tape rewinds to begin, on read-out NOO. - Load tape into machine memory. If there is no alarm All when loading, then the program is o.k. - During .Loading All is indicated: the following is necessary - New tape, delete complete tape or put in program anew under another number. Measures - Summary Repeat loading N NNN 4110- No alarm Ali: Tape c.k, Alarm All: Tape defective - New tape - Delete tape - Put in program under another number.
  • 286. Mode of operation ERASE Mode of operationERASE (Erasing the tape) 1. Press :-Ieyr-47:1 ut1woLci,nedcation figure of C, lights um. IF you she a C-funotIon indioated or ti:e diginal read-out, then pr,s,17,!.6tEl Pur in GES Pfess INPoon the I diF.P l w see amp time, 1 - Pres . 747 + LDElf, L ay ye ' 4 :3ee c•n the The tape 15 erased. After tnat the read-out shows NGC Program Interruption during Tape Operation Only when a g ing mode of operation TOAD, CHECK, ERASE, Program ihnexiruiii:...n L --- PressINP + REVI Tape rewinds to rape begin. Why program interruption? When using mode :.)L operation LOAD: If you find cut that•you caned a nonexisting program. If you press iiP + the tape wilL not a6van.i:e to the nape end but rewin.ii immediately. When using mode of operation CHECK: If you do not want to w,utt for CnECK operation. When mode of peratlon IL is enough that you e rase atoc.t lo seconds. When loading anew the tape machine will erase a:rotca1i y all other remaining tat.
  • 287. Putting in the tape When putting in the Tape, pay Attention: 1. Putting in with left spool full - I: you. switch off the machine, the tape advances i second. 1 sec Tl - if you switch on the machine, the motor rewinds the ta p e 2 seconds. So it is made certain that the tape is at the ver y begininq. 2. Putting in with right spool full O C 0‘ __ - If you put in the tape and Program G65, then the tape rewinds to the b gigining. - If you put in the tape and not program G65, and switch on and off the machine, the following happens: Switch on: Che tape rewinds 2 seconds. Switch off: The tape advances I second. 1 If you carry on like this, the tope moves further through the switching on arj a;ld .;:c) get. ar interrer7-1c the tJpi, A sct:re tegistered.
  • 288. RS 232 Mode RS-232 C Operation — G66 V24 Operation 20 mA Operation RS-232 C is an international standardized Interface. It is an Interface for information interchange. Via this Interface data can be transmitted to peripheric apparatus and vice-versa. The data are transmitted via a cable. For the specific apparatus a cable has to be connected by an expert. The description how to connect cables are found in the wiring diagrams of the producers. Some Examples Connecting a paper tape puncher and paper tape reader The program of the Fl-CNC can be punched on a paper tape: Vice-versa: From a paper tape the program can he transmitted to the F1-CNC. Printing a program Via the RS-232 C Interface the program in the Fl-CNC can be printed on a list.. Connection of computers Via RS-232 C computers and computer systems can be linked to the Fl-CNC. Programs can be transmitted to the Fl-CNC and vice-versa. For computer connection a specific Software is necessary. The•Software is an encoding information which translates the code of the computer to the code of the machine. This Software has to •be written by an expert for the specific computer type.
  • 289. KS 232 Mode Activating RS 232: RS 232 is activated via G. G66 does not enter the memory, it is a switching function. Examples: • Transmission from paper tape to memory of F1-CNC (With Request to send signal) Switch to CNC-mode (memory mus t- be emptyY - insert taper tape - Start paper tape reader 1. Program G66 a a c. a a a 2. PressI. On the display appears A is the abbreviat.icn for ASCII r, American Standard Code for Information interchange( oacooci 3. Pres clEETP 0 The display shows J-0 . = LOAD The program I transferred. At the end cf CO the tra:7:sfer the displa y snows, N
  • 290. RS 232 Mode • Transmission from paper tape to F1-CNC (without Request to send signal) - Insert paper tape Switch to CNC-mode 1. Program G66 O 0 0 0 0 2. Press INPI The display shows A 3. PresstiNL The display shows I A 4. Start paper tape O 0 0 0 0 0 L 0 reader xtransmission begins) • Transmission from F1-CNC to paper tape (with or without Request to send signal) CNC-mode - ,c;c6 :paper tape Start caper tape puncher Insert. 1. Program G66 000000 2 Press IINP . Display shows j. iA 3 splay shows rA essJFWD. (SA = SAVE: The ',p aper tape is punched. 0 00 ! S A I c c o
  • 291. PROGRAM SHEET EMCO Fl CNC Part Nr. Part Name Program Nr. Name Sheet Nr Date 1 Li I n mm E. inch Li
  • 293. Part Nr. Program Nf. Name Sheet Nr. Part Name Date rnm C inch 0
  • 295. PROGRAM SHEET EMCO Fl CNC (M) X (J) (0) (K) (s) z Fiemarhs . 111 II 11 111 Ird 1111 IN Melo 111111 111 Part Nr. Program Nr. Name mm Part Name Pete E inch q
  • 296. PROGRAM SHEET EMCO Fl CNC N X (M) (D) (K) (S) Part Nr. Part Name Program Nr. Name - (L) (1)(H) Sheet Nr. Date Remarks mm inch E.
  • 302. Tool Data Sheet T1 T2 T3 - T4 T5 T6 T7 18 d 2 F t S HZ HzK I d D F t S HZ HzK (mm) (mm) (mm/min) (mm) (U/min) ..... ... (mm) (mm) Cutter dia. Cutter radius Feed speed Max milling depth Spindle speed Difference measure Corrected difference measure Zero-point of workpiece Start position Tool change position Vertical axis system -4-Y/) +241 +Y Ir ille Horizontal axis system I1 , Obb' +X V11110, Zero•point offset (G92) X mm Y mm Z mm Drawing no.: Denomination: Workpiece material: Program no. Name: Dale:
  • 303. Tool Data Sheet T1 ' 12 T3 T4 T5 I T6 • T7 18 d F t S HZ HZK Cutter dia. (mm). . (mm) Cutter radius Feed speed .... (mmimin) F Max. milling depth . (mm). t S .. ....... .. ... (U/min) . ...... Spindle speed . (mm)........ .... Difference measure HZ HzK ... ,...... (mm) .... .. ..... Corrected difference measure d 0 Zero-point of workplace Start position Tool change position Vertical axis system Horizontal axis system +Zei. +Y +X „,...40 :4 VIINOINgis, Zero-point offset (G92) X mm Y mm Z mm Drawing no.: Denomination: Workplace material: Program no. Name: Date:
  • 304. Tool Data Sheet Ti d D= T2 13 T6 T5 T4 17 TB * F t S HZ HZK Cutter dia. (mm): 0 Cutter radius F ......... ,,,,,,,,, (mm/min) Feed speed t• Vertical axis system +Z Max. milling depth 5 .., ..... . .... .: (mm) ,,,,,,, (U/min) (rnm) Difference measure Hzi (mm). Corrected difference measure Horizontal axis system -I-Y6 +Y I .0.‘ 4 Spindle speed Hz - VIIIIIIII.* +X Zero-point onset (G92) • Zero-point of workpiece Start position Tool change position X mm Y mm Z mm Drawing no.: Denomination: Workplace material: Program no Name. Date: +X